Pre-Assembled Electrical Installation Technical Dossier

Pre-Assembled
Electrical
Installation
MicroBASIC
Technical Dossier
V3.02, NOV.05 Installation • Mounting • Commissioning
English / MTIPIEPMB302GB Use • Maintenance • Repair
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
PRE-ASSEMBLED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION MICROBASIC
MANUFACTURER NOTES:
• However the effort made to write this technical dossier, MACPUARSA is not responsible for damages caused by
misprints in the redaction and diagrams.
• Any modification of this document, can be made without notice.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1. PRE-ASSEMBLED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION MICROBASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1. General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.2. Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.1. PEI features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.2. Features of MicroBASIC control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.3. Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3. Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4. Components of PEI Microbasic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.5. Installation general scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.6. General electrical schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.6.1. One-speed electric lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.6.2. Two-speed electric lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.6.3. Electric lift with speed variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.6.4. Direct-starting hydraulic lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.6.5. Star-delta starting hydraulic lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CHAPTER 2. ASSEMBLY AND WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1. General considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.1.1. Machine room installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1.2. Car installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1.3. Shaft installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.1.4. Identification of connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2. Installation in the machine room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2.1. Fixing the control unit cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2.2. Positioning of raceways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.3. Controller-machine connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.3.1. Electric lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.3.2. Hydraulic lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.4. Controller-supply connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.5. Controller-load weighing device connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.5.1. Power unit LM3D + bedframe sensors CCP + display DSC or led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.5.2. Power unit LM3D + bedframe sensors CCP + display MICELET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.5.3. Load pressure switch + display DSC or led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.5.4. Mechanical + display DSC or led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.5.5. ILC2 or ILC3 + display DSC or led or ILC3 + display MICELET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.5.6. Power unit LMCAB + load sensors CAB + display DSC or led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.5.7. Power unit LM3D + load sensors CAB + display MICELET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.5.8. VK-2P + display DINACELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.6. Voltage Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2.7. Terminal box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2.7.1. Without emergency electric control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2.7.2. With emergency electric control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2.8. Travelling cables connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.9. Connection of shaft-controller installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.3. Car installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.3.1. Fastening travelling cables to car-frame base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.3.2. Mounting the inspection box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.3.3. Installing magnetic switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.3.4. Installation of additional lighting on the car roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.3.5. Installation of the skid actuating final limit switches and terminal stopping switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.3.6. Inspection box wiring and car elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3.7. Photocell connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.3.7.1. Static photocell connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.3.7.2. No static photocell connection (free contacts voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3.8. Operator wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3.8.1. Single-phase operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3.8.2. Single-phase power supply operator + cam signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
V3.02, NOV.05 I MTIPIEPMB302GB

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.8.3. Direct current operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

2.3.8.4. Three-phase operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.3.9. Installing and connecting double landing box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.3.10. Installing and connecting an additional stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.3.11. Installing and connecting load weighing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.11.1. Power unit LM3D + bedframe sensors CCP + display DSC or led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.11.2. Power unit LM3D + bedframe sensors CCP + display MICELET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.11.3. Load pressure switch + display DSC or led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.11.4. Mechanical + display DSC or led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.3.11.5. ILC2 or ILC3 + display DSC or led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.3.11.6. ILC3 + display MICELET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.3.11.7. Power unit LMCAB + load sensors CAB + display DSC or led . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.3.11.8. Power unit LM3D + load sensors CAB + display MICELET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.3.11.9. VK-2P + progressive display MB-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3.12. Car control station connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4. Shaft installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4.1. Installation of travelling cable supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4.2. Shaft wiring installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.4.3. Installation and connection of shaft elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.4.4. Magnet installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.5. Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.6. Specific assembly guidelines for installations with speed variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.6.1. Special elements for VVVF installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.6.2. Connection of the machine power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.6.3. Machine room wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.7. Assembly instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.7.1. Material supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.7.2. Magnetic sensor assembly on the support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2.7.3. Magnetic installation on the magnet support (1 per door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.7.4. Sensor installation under the car door track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.7.5. Support magnet assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.7.6. Assembly inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CHAPTER 3. COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.1. Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.1.1. Measuring the isolation resistance of the different circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.1.2. Checking the electrical continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.2. Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.3. Table with possible causes which prevent run of lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.4. Table of states of the lift elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.5. Table of failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.6. Incidences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.7. Control unit follow-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.7.1. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.7.2. Other light indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
CHAPTER 4. MICROBASIC CONTROL UNIT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.1. Compatibility. MicroBasic - MicroBasic Prima . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.2. MicroBASIC PRIMA board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.2.1 Main components and general scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.2.2 Information provided by the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.2.2.1. Indicator lights (leds) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.2.2.2. 3-digit display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.2.2.2.1. First information provided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.1.2.2.2. Program mode information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
4.2.2.2.3. Information in normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.2.2.2.4. Information during inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.2.2.2.5. Information in special situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.2.3. Configuration and adjustment of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2.3.1. Parametrization method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2.3.1.1. Elements for configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2.3.1.2. Types of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2.3.1.3. Parametrization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2.3.2. Parameters configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.2.3.3. Description of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.2.4.1. Commissioning. Return Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.1.4.2. Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
4.2.4.3. Inspection operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
V3.02, NOV.05 II MTIPIEPMB302GB

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2.4.4. Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 98

4.2.4.5. Other operations and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 99
4.2.4.5.1. Opening and closing of doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 99
4.2.4.5.2. Relevelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 100
4.2.4.5.3. Fireman control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 102
4.2.4.5.4. Mixed selective control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 102
4.2.4.5.5. Asymmetric lifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 102
4.3. Printed circuit board AMB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 103
4.3.1. Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 103
4.3.2. Information provided by the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 103
4.3.3. Configuration of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 104
4.3.4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 107
4.4. Printed circuit board AMB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 108
4.4.1. Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 108
4.4.2. Information provided by the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 109
4.4.2.1. Led light indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 109
4.4.2.2. 4-Digit display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 110
4.4.2.2.1. RUN Mode: information indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 110
4.4.2.2.2. PROGRAM Mode: Information indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 112
4.4.2.2.3. Special indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 112
4.4.3. Configuration and adjustment of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 113
4.4.3.1. Configuration elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 113
4.4.3.2. PROGRAM Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 113
4.4.3.3. Parameters configuration table for MicroBASIC control unit with additional AMB2 board . . . . . . . 115
4.4.3.4. Configuration of parameters on the AMB2 circuit board . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 115
4.4.4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 117
4.4.4.1. Operation in normal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 117
4.4.4.2. Redundant operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 117
4.4.5. Control unit errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 118
CHAPTER 5. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.1. Machine room installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

5.1.1. Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.1.1.1. One speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.1.1.2. Two speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.1.1.3. Speed variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.1.1.4. Hydraulic. Direct starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.1.1.5. Hydraulic. Star-delta starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.1.2. Machine room terminals. Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.1.3. PCB MicroBASIC terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.2. Car installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.2.1. Car control station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.2.2. Inspection box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.2.3. Magnetic switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.2.3.1. Orange box magnetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.2.3.2. Commercial magnetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
5.2.4. Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.2.4.1. Single-phase supply + cam signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
5.2.4.2. Single-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.2.4.3. Direct current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.2.4.4. Three-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
5.2.5. Photocells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
5.2.5.1. Static photocell. NPN type with NO output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
5.2.5.2. Standard photocell connection (voltage-free contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5.2.6. Double landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
5.3. Shaft installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.3.1. Safety series in shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.3.2. Terminal stopping switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.3.3. Pit box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.3.4. Landing control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.4. Special wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5.4.1. Safety series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5.4.2. Call and register indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5.4.2.1. Car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5.4.2.2. Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
5.4.3. Lighting installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
5.4.4. Telephone installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
5.4.4.1. Description of compliance with EN81-28: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5.5. Particulary wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
V3.02, NOV.05 III MTIPIEPMB302GB

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.1. Intercom set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 166

5.5.2. Dual intercom set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 166
5.5.3. Speed governor remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 167
5.5.4. Alarm identification in multiple installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 167
5.5.5. Emergency electric control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 168
5.5.6. Programmable inputs and outputs of MicroBASIC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 169
5.5.7. Speed change mode “3C” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 169
5.5.8. Imminent departure direction arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 170
5.5.9. Coming indicator lights in simplex and duplex universal control units/Multiplexed display . . . . . . . . . 170
5.5.10. Coming indicator lights in simplex and duplex selective control units . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 171
5.5.11. Imminent departure direction arrows and coming indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 171
5.5.12. Car at floor light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 172
5.5.13. Wiring modification to register voltage different of 24Vdc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 172
5.5.14. Inspection control box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 173
5.5.15. Oil heating resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 174
5.5.16. Soft Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 175
5.5.17. Oil refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 176
ANNEX I. ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ANNEX II. Differences between versions 3.01 and 3.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
V3.02, NOV.05 IV MTIPIEPMB302GB

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
CHAPTER 1. PRE-ASSEMBLED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION MICROBASIC
1.1. General features
This manual is a guide to the assembly of the pre-assembled electrical installation (PEI), and also a tool containing all the
necessary information.
The basic feature of this installation is the plug-in connection system of all the components. This significantly simplifies and
reduces connection time.
On the other hand, the highly cost-effective MicroBASIC control unit of this installation, is applied both to electric and
hydraulic lifts, thus covering more than 90% of the installations currently available on the market.
1.2. Features
1.2.1. PEI features
• Power supply voltage: 400Vac or 230Vac, frequency 50 or 60 Hz depending on local network.

• Control unit voltage: 24Vdc.
• Safety series voltage: 110Vac
• Call register with protection against overloads and short circuits. Standard: 24Vdc. Optional: 20Vac, 60Vac, 110Vac,
220Vac.
• Position indicator outputs (display). Standard: BINARY 24Vdc. Optional: DECIMAL at any voltage, direct or alternating
(with MS-MPX extension).
• Additional landing indicators: direction arrows, busy, available, door open. Any voltage, alternating or direct.
• Car indicators: direction arrows. Standard: 24Vdc. Consult for other voltages.
• Optional indicators with MS-MPX extension board:
S Coming light indicator (‘coming’ arrows).
S Imminent departure light indicator (direction arrows).
Both at any voltage, direct or alternating.
• Door operator motor output.
Standard:
S Single-phase 220 Vac.
S Single-phase 220 Vac + cam signal (PUARSA).
S Three-phase at 110Vac , 220Vac or 380 Vac;
Optional:
S Direct current 12Vdc, 24Vdc, 48Vdc or 110Vdc.
• Output for brake and cam at any voltage.
• Speed regulation adding frequency inverter 3VFMAC. Optimal quality/cost solution for installations with speed regulation
up to 1,6 m/sec. An ideal product for the upgrade of obsolete 1-speed installations to this type of installations.
• Connection to load weighing device (overload and complete) with car signalling at 24 Vdc. With load weighing device
VK-2P a progressive display and serial communication with inverter 3VFMAC is possible.
• Relevelling (hydraulic only) and approach with doors open (electric 3VF and hydraulic), with the incorporation of leveller
538. See the corresponding dossier.
• At minimum extra cost a complete rescue system may be added:
S Electric: RESCATAMAC 30. See the corresponding dossier.
S Hydraulic: door opening system, 041, 042, 043. See the corresponding dossier.
• There is also a pre-assembled electrical installation for machineroomless lifts (SCM). See the corresponding dossier.
On request it is possible to manufacture installations with special features.
V3.02, NOV.05 Page 1 MTIPIEPMB302GB

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
1.2.2. Features of MicroBASIC control unit
The MicroBASIC control unit is used to control electric lifts of 1 and 2 speeds, speed variation and hydraulic lifts, through
one or several printed circuit boards, depending on the complexity of the installation.
The following table shows the different possible installations and the corresponding control architectures, according to the
type of control unit and the number of lifts.
CONTROL UNIT SELECTIVE SELECTIVE

UNIVERSAL
No. of LIFTS ASCENT OR DESCENT ASCENT AND DESCENT
p # 10: MBAS single p # 10: MBAS single p#6: MBAS single

1 (SIMPLEX)
10 < p # 16: AMB1 10 < p # 16: AMB1 6<p # 16: AMB1
- p # 10: MBAS single p # 6: MBAS single

2 (DUPLEX)
- 10 < p # 16: AMB2 6<p # 16: AMB2
3 (TRIPLEX) - p # 16: AMB2
4 (QUADRUPLEX) - p # 16: AMB2
Control architectures:
• MBAS single: n microBASIC boards.

• AMB1: n MicroBASIC boards + 1 AMB1 board
• AMB2: n MicroBASIC boards + 1 or 2 AMB2 boards
p being: number of landings

n being: number of lifts
MicroBASIC and MicroCOM boards will be placed each in each cabinet, while the location of boards AMB1 and AMB2 may
vary depending on the features of the installation.
In AMB2 architecture with triplex or quadruplex installations two AMB2 boards are used (redundant control), in order to
guarantee service in case of fault in any of them.
Other features:
• Broad functional range. Up to 64 configuration parameters.

• Failure detection in real time. It analyses more than 20 types of failures. Non-volatile storage of the last 16 failures.
• Display/leds on PCB MicroBASIC displaying in real time:
S Car position.
S Element of the installation preventing the lift from moving.
S Type of call and floor it serves.
S Car and landing calls registered.
S State of lift components.
S Errors stored.
• Incorporates enabling of emergency electrovalve in hydraulic lift, thus enabling termination of the operation on next
floor in down direction or any other floor.
• Fire-brigade operation.
• Electric generator control unit (in duplex installations without AMB2 board).

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Asymmetrical lifts (at upper or lower floors).
AMB2 architecture also presents other features (no AMB3):
• Remote control and sending of short messages (SMS) to GSM mobile phones with failure code.
• Five communication channels in series (4 x RS - 485) and (1 x RS - 232C), all with galvanized insulation.
Special functions for particular installations may be installed on request.
1.2.3. Standards
• EN 81-1/2 (in all points where it might be applicable).

• EN 12015, Electromagnetic Emission.
• EN 12016, Electromagnetic Immunity.
• EN 60204-1 (in all points where it might be applicable).
• EN 81-28
• EN 81-70
1.3. Installation Requirements
• Electric controllers should be installed in a closed room with restricted access and free from ambient pollution. The
cabinet installation height must be between 0,4 and 2 metres. Dimensions of the machine room must enable the
following free areas:
S 2-metre height in work areas.
S Horizontal area in front of the control panel with the following dimensions:
Depth: 0,7 metres measured from the external surface of the cabinet.
Width: the greatest of the following; 0,5 metres or the total width of the control panel.
S Horizontal area in control, maintenance and emergency manual operation areas of 0,6 x 0,5 metres.
• The correct temperature range is from +5 to +40ºC controlled by a temperature probe installed in the machine room.
However, the range permissible in our installations exceeds these margins.
• Maximum humidity conditions for the equipment to work in are 93% HR without condensation.
• The level of protection of the control unit cabinets in the installation, which should at least be IP2X, should not be
altered.
• Electric controllers must be connected to a safety earth that will be the first to be connected and the last to be
disconnected.
• Fuses of a gauge higher than that indicated in the table must not be used.
• The maximum voltage applied in the safety series will be 125V.
• Wires and tips (where necessary) connected to the equipment will be of copper or material of similar electrochemical
properties.
• Mains frequency will be 50 or 60 Hz, depending on the local network.
• Main switches.
Machine rooms shall contain, for each lift, a main switch capable of breaking the supply to the lift on all the live conductors
(phase and neutral included). This switch shall be capable of interrupting the highest current involved in normal conditions
of use of the lift. Moreover, this switch shall not cut the circuits feeding car lighting or ventilation (if any), socket outlet
on the car roof, and alarm device. This main switch shall have stable open and close positions, and shall be capable of
being locked-of in the open position with the use of a padlock or equivalent, to ensure no inadvertent operation. The
control mechanism for the main switch shall be easily and rapidly accessible from the entrance(s) to the machine room.
If the machine room is common to several lifts, the control mechanism of the ,main switches shall allow the lift concerned
to be identified easily.
A switch shall allow to break the supply of lighting circuit and socket outlet on the car. If the machine room is common to
several lifts, a switch for each car shall be needed. This switch must be placed close to the input to control lighting supply.
On machine room, a switch or equivalent device must be placed close to the input to control lighting supply.
Both switches shall be provided with its own short circuit protection.
• Indicated consumption is approximate and may be subject to alteration according to the model of the machine,
operator, cam, etc...
• The control unit cabinet has a label at the door indicating some of the installation requirements.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• For machineroomless installations, also see the specific manual of this type of installations.
Power magnetic
Rated current
Switch gauge
Three-phase volt. Approximate weight

Supply
Cut-off voltage Lighting voltage
00 08 16 24
01 09 17 25
02 10 18 26
03 11 19 27
04 12 20 28
Important note: users are warned that the
05 13 21 29
protection of the equipment is not ensured if it is
06 14 22 30
not used as specified by the manufacturer.
07 15 23 31
• Connection of the equipment to the network (excluding the IT type power system), three-phase mains supply and one-
phase lighting supply (separate circuits), should be performed with class 5 type 05V-K flexible copper wires protected
with easily accessible differential and thermomagnetic switches, located near the equipment and clearly identified.
Dimensions of the wire sections and protections will be applicable according to the following table:

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
RATED SUPPLY
VOLTAGE POWER QF FF QA FA
CURRENT SECTION
V CV Kw A mm2 Curve C 300 mA Curve C 30mA
4 3 12 4 16 25
5 37 14 4 16 25
55 4 16 4 16 25
75 55 22 10 25 25
10 75 28 10 32 40
220/230 135 10 40 16 40 40
15 11 42 25 50 63
20 15 54 25 63 63
25 185 68 50 80 80
30 22 80 50 80 80
34 25 84 70 100 100
*4 3 7 1.5 10 25
*5 37 8 1.5 10 25 10 25
* 5.5 4 9 1.5 10 25
75 55 12 4 16 25
10 75 16 4 16 25
135 10 21 10 25 25
15 11 225 10 25 25
380/400
20 15 30 10 32 40
25 185 37 16 40 40
30 22 44 25 50 63
34 25 50 25 50 63
40 30 60 35 63 63
50 37 72 50 80 80
61 45 85 70 100 100
* Approximate value
Abbreviations:
QF: Power thermomagnetic switch: tripolar, 10KA, UNE 60947.2, curve C.
FF: Power differential switch: quadripolar, UNE-EN 61008, sensitivity 300mA, class AC.
QA: Lighting thermomagnetic switch: bipolar, UNE-EN 60898, 10A, bipolar, curve C, 6KA.
FA: Lighting differential switch: bipolar, UNE 60947.2, curve C, 10KA

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
1.4. Components of PEI Microbasic
The components of the pre-assembled electrical installation are grouped into 6 blocks, each known as IPX.
The following table details all these elements, indicating which block they belong to, their name, where they are located
in the installation and a short description of the same.
BLOCK ELEMENT LOCATION OTHER FEATURES
CONTROL BOARDS AND

IP1 CONTROLLER MACHINE ROOM FREQUENCY INVERTER, IF ANY, ARE
LOCATED HERE.
ELECTRICALLY CONNECT
CONTROLLER WITH INSPECTION
TRAVELLING CABLES THROUGHOUT THE SHAFT BOX AND CAR CONTROL STATION.
FEATURES PLUG-IN CONNECTORS.
IP2 ELECTRICALLY CONNECTS

PANEL SUPPLY CABLE MACHINE ROOM CONTROLLER WITH MACHINE
ROOM PROTECTION BOX.
ELECTRICALLY CONNECTS
CONTROLLER WITH MACHINE OR
MOTOR SUPPLY CABLE MACHINE ROOM
CENTRAL UNIT. IN CASE OF 3VF,
SUPPLY U, V, W IS SCREENED.
FEATURES CONTROL ELEMENTS

FOR INSPECTION AND EMERGENCY
IP3 INSPECTION BOX ON CAR ROOF
OPERATION AND SERVES AS
CONNECTION BOX.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
POSITION ACCORDING TO THE

MAGNETS GUIDES
TYPE OF INSTALLATION
MAGNETIC KIT
TOGETHER WITH MAGNETS,

MAGNETIC SWITCH CAR FRAME CONSTITUTES THE CAR
POSITIONING SYSTEM
IP3
CALL BUTTONS. SIGNALLING

CAR CONTROL STATION CAR ELEMENTS. EMERGENCY
TELEPHONE. EMERGENCY LIGHT
CONNECTS TELEPHONE, LIGHTING

PIT SWITCH, POWER SOCKET, STOP
PIT BOX
BUTTON.
SHAFT INSTALLATION
IP4
FEATURES PLUG-IN CONNECTORS

SHAFT WIRING THROUGHOUT THE SHAFT TO CONNECT TO SHAFT
INSTALLATION ELEMENTS
UPPER AND LOWER

ENABLE CHANGE OF SPEED ON
TERMINAL STOPPING GUIDES
EXTREME FLOORS
SWITCHES

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
UPPER AND LOWER

OPEN SAFETY SERIES WHEN THE
FINAL LIMIT GUIDES
LIFT EXCEEDS NORMAL TRAVEL
SWITCHES
LANDING CONTROL ONE PER FLOOR. LANDING CALLS

FLOORS
STATIONS BUTTONS AND SIGNALLING.
SHAFT INSTALLATION
IP4
OPTIONAL.
SHAFT LIGHTING THROUGHOUT THE SHAFT 220 VAC POWER SUPPLY.
60W LAMPS
THEY FIX THE ELECTRICAL

IP5 SUPPORTS SEE CHAPTER 2 IN SHAFT AND ON CAR
INSTALLATION ELEMENTS.
- MACHINE ROOM PROTECT WIRING AND TAKE IT ALL

IP6 RACEWAYS
- SHAFT THROUGH THE INSTALLATION.
This table shows the most standard and most common elements, but other non-standard elements may be included in the
installation.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
1.5. Installation general scheme
The following figure gives a clear idea of the location of elements in the installation.
Since it is a general scheme, not all installations will coincide completely.
Controller
Machine
Speed governor
Shaft lighting
Magnetic switch
Inspection box
Upper final
limit switch
Upper terminal
stopping switch
Terminal stopping
switch actuating magnet
Raceway for
shaft installation
Skid
Shaft lighting
Travelling cables
Pit box Lower terminal

stopping switch
Lower final
limit switch
Electric lift
Speed governor rope
tension pulley

NOTE: All abbreviations used in these diagrams and other drawings are detailed in the annex, at the end of this manual.
MTIPIEPMB302GB
+ 12F SIR STOP
R S T
FM (2A) 7 102 SAC SAF 220 SLVH SCTH
110 Vs RMT1 SPRS
380 Vp TRM 15 12 8
20 Vs 5 6
60 Vs SPRB
KRFF
B 220 Vp
48 Vs
STOPF
80 Vs SCC SCE SP
0 Vp STLH SFI SFS
L1 L3 L1 L3 0 Vs 106 105 104 103
KCB KCS 14
T1 T3 T1 T3 3 RZS 17
2 RMT2 PIN 103
4 5 6
27 1 8 00
A1 A1
A1 A KCB KCS
RMP RZS Other safety contacts not
0Vdc 4
A KCM 8 1 represented here may also exist.
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
A2 A2 A
RMT1
L1 L2 L3 A2 7 9
3
14
KCM 11 13 4 4
KRFF 5 2
T1 T2 T3 RS RPA
11 RMR 3 6
t
3
Page 10
2 26
2 4 2
U V W QIM t t 25
RZS RB
1 3 4 2 3
RVR
3
M 3
RM
3
3
23
24
Board-controller connection terminals
1.6. General electrical schemes
Board-car/shaft connection terminals

1.6.1. One-speed electric lift Machine room terminal strip connections
MicroBASIC board internal wiring
MicroBASIC board external wiring
V3.02, NOV.05
MTIPIEPMB302GB
+ 12F
SIR STOP
R S T SAC SAF SLVH SCTH
FM (2A) 7 102 220
110 Vs RMT1 SPRS
380 Vp TRM 15 12 8
20 Vs 5 6
KRFF 60 Vs SPRB
B 220 Vp
48 Vs
STOPF
80 Vs STLH SFI SFS
0 Vp SCC SCE 104 SP 103
L1 L3 L1 L3 0 Vs 106 105
KCB KCS 14 RZS
Third contact T1 T3 T1 T3 17
used as 5 6 PIN 103
2 RMT2
brake control 27
8
00
A1 A1 1
A A RZS Other safety contacts not
0Vdc KCB KCS RMP
1 represented here may also exist.
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
A2 A2 8
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 7 9
KCR KCL A1 A1 4 4
5 A KCR KCL A RS
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 14 RPA
A2 A2 3 6
KRFF
t
Page 11
11 13 26
11
2
t t 4 2
U V W U1 V1 W1 25
2 RMR RB
3
QIM 3
2
1
4 RZS
RM
M RMT1 3 4 2 4 3
23
3
3 RVR
3
24
1.6.2. Two-speed electric lift
Machine room terminal strip connections

V3.02, NOV.05
MTIPIEPMB302GB
+ 12F
SIR STOP
R S T SAC SAF SLVH SCTH
FM (2A) 7 102 220
110 Vs RMT1 SPRS
380 Vp TRM 20 Vs
15
5 6
12 8
60 Vs SPRB
B 220 Vp
48 Vs
STOPF
80 Vs SFS
0 Vp SCC SCE SP STLH SFI

R S T 0 Vs 106 105 104 103
3VF
14 RZS
U V W C1 C2 17
5 6 PIN 103
2 RMT2
L1 L2 L3 27 00
A1 Other safety contacts not
K1 A1 A1
KRSE A RZS represented here may also exist.
0Vdc A K1 K2 A RMP
T1 T2 T3 A2 A2 A2
9
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
L1 L2 L3 34
3VFMAC1
A1 4 4
5 KRNS RS
K2 14 KRL2 RPA
A2 35 3 6
T1 T2 T3 KRFF t
11 13 26
11
2 7
Page 12
t t 4 2
25
U V W
2 RMR 5 RB
KRSE 3
QIM 3
2
1 9
4 RZS
RM
M RMT1 3 4 2 4 3
23
3
RVR
3 3
24
1.6.3. Electric lift with speed variation

V3.02, NOV.05
MTIPIEPMB302GB
SIR STOP
R S T + 12F SAC SAF
102 220 SLVH SCTH
110 Vs FM (2A) RMT1 7 SPRS
380 Vp TRM 15 12 8
20 Vs 5 6
KRFF 60 Vs SPRB
220 Vp PIN 103
48 Vs
80 Vs STOPF
0 Vp STLH SFS
L1 L2 L3 0 Vs SCC SCE 104 SP
106 105 103
KCG 14
T1 T2 T3
2 17
Other safety contacts not
L1 L2 L3 represented here may also exist.
5 6 00
KCM 0Vdc 4
RMT1 RZS
T1 T2 T3
3
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
RMT2 Vs CPS
RMP TRV GRV MAC-538
5
27 2 (-) 28
14
U V W t t RZS 0 Vs 1 (+)
KRFF 26 23
Page 13
TRV/TRM
11
4
2 3 RPA 3 RMT2
M QIM RS 6
4 RM 5 7
3 1 4
24 0 Vdc
6
29
9 a 3
RVR
4 3 A2
A2 A2 36
2 4 KVR
KCG KCM 5 7 A2
280 A1
A1 4 2 3 RB KVD
A1 RET A1
c e RZS 204
Board-controller connection terminals 2
1.6.4. Direct-starting hydraulic lift
YS ONLY EXITS IN CASE OF YE YR YS YD

3 (-) (-) (-) -
Board-car/shaft connection terminals SOFT STOP AND/OR DOOR LOCK
RMR
2 (+) (+) (+) +
110 Vp TRV 281 206 240 205
20 Vs
60 Vs 53
MicroBASIC board internal wiring KCM
48 Vs RMT3 REM2 REM1 30 54 7
6 7 6 4 6 4
0 Vp 80 Vs +12F 25
0 Vs
MicroBASIC board external wiring TRM 0 Vs
V3.02, NOV.05
11
Ys only exits in case of
Soft stop and/or door lock
MTIPIEPMB302GB
SIR STOP
R S T + 12F SAC SAF
102 220 SLVH SCTH
110 Vs FM (2A) RMT1 7 SPRS
380 Vp TRM 15 12 8
20 Vs 5 6
KRFF 60 Vs SPRB
220 Vp PIN 103
48 Vs
80 Vs STOPF
0 Vp STLH SFS
0 Vs SCC SCE 104 SP
106 105 103
14
2 17
Other safety contacts not
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 KCE 0Vdc represented here may also exist.
5 6 00
KCM KCT 4
L1 L2 L3 RZS
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 14 RMT1
3 RMT2 Vs CPS
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
T1 T2 T3 KRFF RMP
11 5 TRV GRV MAC-538
27 2 (-) 28
2
t t
QIM RZS
W X 0 Vs 1 (+) 23
1
Page 14
V Y TRV/TRM
U Z 26 4
3 RPA
M 6 3 RMT2
RS
4 RM 5 7
3 24 4
6 0 Vdc
29
9 a 3
RVR
4 3 A2
Board-controller connection terminals A2 A2 A2 KVR
2 4 A2
KCM KCT KCE 280 A1
A1 A1 A1 3 RB KVD
Board-car/shaft connection terminals RET A1
1.6.5. Star-delta starting hydraulic lift
c e RZS 204
2
KCE
Machine room terminal strip YE YR YS YD
3 (-) (-) (-) -
connections
RMR (+) (+) (+)
2 +
281 206 295 205
110 Vp TRV 20 Vs 240
60 Vs 53
MicroBASIC board external wiring KCE
48 Vs RMT3 REM2 REM1 30 54 7
+12F 6 7 6 4 6 4
0 Vs 0 Vp 80 Vs 25
TRM 0 Vs
V3.02, NOV.05
11
YS represents start valve and also
soft stop and door lock valve in case
of taking it
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
CHAPTER 2. ASSEMBLY AND WIRING
2.1. General considerations
This chapter seeks to provide a method to help and guide you in clear and simple terms, through the assembly of the
pre-assembled installation, further establishing an order to be followed.
The whole process described below, takes for granted that the mechanical installation has already been carried out.
A general circuit diagram of all connections of a standard installation is shown below, however connections of the
different parts of the installation will go on to be mentioned.
2.1.1. Machine room installation
Controller
Intercom
(optional)
Different contacts
of the machine
Motor
supply
Building
Travelling supply
cables
2.1.2. Car installation
Controller
Travelling cables
(3) (3)
Car ventilation
Car light Safety gear

contact
Overload and complete contact
(1) Slack-rope
Photocells contact
Photocells 2
(1)
Double
landing box
(1) (1) (1)
(1) DE_-_ Additional
(3)
shaft light
(2)
(1) In case of double landing only. (2)

(2) In case of load weighing device VK-2P only. (2)
(3) Marked with type 2 labels.
Load weighing
device
(2) (2)
Car control
station
(3)

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.1.3. Shaft installation
Controller
Speed governor
Hatch
Shaft lighting
Upper final limit switch
Upper terminal stopping switch
Upper landing control station
Lock of upper automatic or

semiautomatic door
Lower terminal stopping switch
Lower final limit switch
Lower landing control station
Lock of upper automatic or

semiautomatic door
Speed governor cable

tension pulley
STOP Pit stop button

(additional)
OFF
STOP
Pit box
ON

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.1.4. Identification of connections
All cables of the pre-assembled electrical installation are provided with a number of labels on their ends, which inform,
through representative symbols, of the place or element where each one of them should be connected.
These labels refer to the following elements:
CABINET MACHINE LANDING CONTROL STATION CAR CONTROL STATION
INSPECTION BOX PIT BOX ACCESS TRAP CAR LIGHT
STOP BUTTON LOAD WEIGHING DEVICE INTERCOM SET CAR INTERLOCK
AUTOMATIC DOOR SEMIAUTOM. DOOR LOCK CONTROL STATION TRAVEL. CABLE ENCODER
TERMINAL STOPPING SWITCH VOICE SYNTHESIZER OVERLOAD / COMPLETE DING-DONG

DO
G NG
DIN
FINAL LIMIT SWITCH MAGNETIC SWITCHES STRING OF LIGHTS VENTILATION FAN
GOVERNOR CABLE VOLTAGE SPEED GOV.
OPERATOR DOUBLE LANDING BOX
SAFETY GEAR SLACK-ROPE
PHOTOCELL CAR ROOF LIGHT

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2. Installation in the machine room
2.2.1. Fixing the control unit cabinet
• On the wall (standard): Drill the necessary holes in the wall of the machine room to bear two plugs of 10
supplied, together with the corresponding screws within the IP5. Mark previously the position of the drill holes, at
the distance corresponding to the cabinet in question. Mount the cabinet, with the aid of the flanges supplied with
it, as indicated in the figure.
• On the slab (optional): Drill the necessary holes in the slab base to bear 4 plugs of 10 supplied, as indicated in
the right figure, together with the corresponding screws, located within the IP5. Then fix the two C supports on
the slab. Fasten the cabinet, with the aid of the front bearings and the two flat iron supplied, as indicated in the
left figure.
10mm x 50mm (x4)

min 60
min 120
A - 60
TYPE OF CABINET A = CABINET

B (mm)
SUPPLEMENT DEPTH (mm) WIDTH (mm)
150 500
SUPPL. 150 100
200 500, 600
250 500, 600, 800

SUPPL. 250 180
300 600, 800
Flat iron
Type C support

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2.2. Positioning of raceways
If the cabinet is fastened on the slab, raceways will not be necessary in the machine room as the wiring will run from
the cabinet directly to the shaft.
When the cabinet is fastened on to the wall, raceways will be used to drive and protect the wiring in the machine
room. Raceways must be fixed to the wall and/or the machine room floor, using the elements shown in the left figure.
To protect cable output as much as possible, assembly as shown in the right figure should be performed, cutting the
raceway to size and folding the cabinet cover L-shaped. Like this, ropes going out of the controller go directly into this
raceway. Once the raceway cover is in place, mount lower cover of the cabinet, L shaped, so that it presses on the
duct and prevents it from opening.
Cabinet
Elements for fixing raceways
Raceway base
Plug
Screw
Cabinet lower cover
Raceway cover
Cables connecting the controller with the machine (under corrugated tube) must be fixed using the flanges shown in
the left figure, which in turn will be fixed with the plugs and screws used to fix the raceways.
To fix other cables which might be free in the machine room, use the screws and fasteners shown in the right figure.
Flange
Screw Fastener
NOTE:
All fixing elements are located within IP-5.
RACEWAYS TYPE IN MACHINE ROOM
CIRCUITS RACEWAYS TYPE
Machine supply Corrugated tube PG29
Control supply (optional) Corrugated tube PG29
Exit to shaft* Raceways 80 x 60 (width x high)
* Shaft installation and control rope are included

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2.3. Controller-machine connection
There is a series of quick connectors on the controller rail, where all the machine’s connections are made. The supply
hose is connected to terminals U,V,W (and besides U1,V1,W1 for 2 speeds and X,Y,Z for hydraulic lifts with star-delta
starting). For 1 and 2 speeds and hydraulic installations, the earth will be connected to the earth terminal on the track.
For 3VF installations, it should be connected directly to the plate. (See section 2.6)
There are other terminals for lower section wires, where the following will be connected:
MACHINE ROOM TERMINALS IDENTIFICATION COLOURS DESCRIPTION
In hydraulic lifts: oil temperature contact

(NC), thermistor thermal probe (PTC),
overpressure contact (NC), motor
TS1, TS2 White, white
temperature contact (NC).
In electric lifts: thermistor thermal probe
(PTC)
204, 206 Black, red Electric brake (electric lifts only)
In hydraulic lifts: valve heater

0~, 220 Blue, brown
In electric lifts: machine ventilation fan
204 Black Valve common (except for emergency)
205 Green Descent valve / descent in hydraulic lifts
206 Red Fast speed valve or speed change valve
star starting valve and/or soft starter

240 Pink
and/or door lock
280, 281 Black, white Emergency valve common
+, -, C1+, C1-, C2+, C2- Red, blue, white, brown, pink, black Encoder (3VF electric)
210, 212 (CAC) Brown, blue Car lighting supply
210, 212 (CAC) Brown, blue Shaft lighting supply
+24, 91 Red, white-blue
2.2.3.1. Electric lift
Controller
91 107 216 + - C1+C1- C2+ C2-
TS1 TS2 0~ 220 206 204 R S T U V W t U1 V1 W1
Supply
CCS CENC In case of
2 speeds
Mesh fixing
+ - C1+ C1- C2+ C2-
Fixing earth to
Thermal probe,
encoder mesh
brake and
ventilation fan
Encoder connection
(in case of 3VF only)
Mains supply
Brake ventilation
thermal probe
U, V, W + earth
Machine supply

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2.3.2. Hydraulic lift
Controller
TS1 TS2 281 280 240 206 205 204 0~ 220 R S T U V W t X Y Z
Supply In case of
star-delta
starting
Mesh fixing
Thermal probe,
valves,
Thermal probe resistance
Heater Mains supply
Emergency valve
Fast speed valve
Descent valve
Delta starting valve
U, V, W + earth
Machine supply
2.2.4. Controller-supply connection
First of all, cut off power in the protections box.
ATTENTION: Power to the controller should be switched off until installation in the machine room and car are finished.
When disconnecting the whole installation, the earth connection must be the last one to be disconnected. Lighting and
car supply must be independent of the control unit and each other. connect the three phases R,S,T of the supply cable
to the controller terminals identified by these letters. For 1 and 2 speed and hydraulic installations, the earth will be
connected to the earth terminal located on the track. For 3VF installations it will be connected directly on to the plate.
(see section 2.6).
R S T

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2.5. Controller-load weighing device connection
2.2.5.1. Power unit LM3D + bedframe sensors CCP + display DSC or led
Controller
216
220Vac - 0Vac: Power unit supply
CBC_
+24 - 91: Overload signal
+24 - 107: Complete signal
CSMM
220Vac 0Vac +24 91 107
CBC_
Connect to
216
load weighing
device
Control station
travelling cable
2.2.5.2. Power unit LM3D + bedframe sensors CCP + display MICELET
Controller 220Vac - 0Vac: Power unit supply

D+ D- +24 - 91: Overload signal
+24 - 107: Complete signal
CBC_ D+, D-: Display signals
CSMM
D+ D- 220Vac 0Vac +24 91 107
CBC_
Connect to
D+ D-
load weighing
device
Control station
travelling cable
2.2.5.3. Load pressure switch + display DSC or led
+24 - 91: Overload signal

Controller
216
CBC_
CSMM
+24 91
Hydraulic power unit

CBC_
216 Connect to
pressure switch
2.2.5.4. Mechanical + display DSC or led
Controller
CCS CCS
216 216 Control station
107 107 travelling cable
91 91

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2.5.5. ILC2 or ILC3 + display DSC or led or ILC3 + display MICELET
Controller
CCS CCS
91 91
2.2.5.6. Power unit LMCAB + load sensors CAB + display DSC or led
Controller
CCS CCS
91 91
Controller
2.2.5.7. Power unit LM3D + load sensors CAB + display MICELET
Control station
CCS CCS travelling cable
216 216
107 107
91 91
2.2.5.8. VK-2P + display DINACELL
Controller
220 Vp
F
K1
3VFMAC +24 Vdc
83 84 (22 - MBAS)
serie "F"
91 107 216 T1 T2 220VpINH
CCS CBA_ CCA_
91 107 216 T1T2 220Vp INH
Control station Control station Inspection box

travelling cable travelling cable travelling cable

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2.6. Voltage Change
• Supply voltage:
If it is necessary to change the machine’s supply voltage, it should be done by changing the connection of the white-
blue wire going to the transformer, changing it from 380Vp to 220Vp or vice-versa.
ATTENTION: Cut-off the power supply when making this change.
Transformer
In controller
TRM
0Vs 380Vp 220Vp 0Vp
White-blue
This change can directly affect the dimensioning of the wires section and contactors.
• Brake / cam / valves voltage:
Terminals ~1 and ~2 of plates GRF, GRL and GRV correspond to the supply voltage input for brake, cam and valves
respectively.
Should you wish to change the voltage value, disconnect and insulate the wires corresponding to these terminals and
connect the new desired voltage here. In controller.
GRF / GRL / GRV
In controller
1 2 (-) (+)

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2.7. Terminal box
A terminal box and a connectors set is supplied optionally, which enable the car to be raised and lowered before the
electrical installation is carried out. However, connection will have to be made to the machine and the controller must
be powered.
The connectors supplied will have to be plugged in to the corresponding male connectors of the control panel. Finally,
the terminal box will be connected to the female hanging from the connectors set, as indicated in the following
diagram. For security reasons, it is necessary the installation of the speed governor to operate with this box, and
because of it, the speed governor cable voltage contact connection between the points indicated is recommended.
2.2.7.1. Without emergency electric control unit

Connect to
a speed governor
cable voltage contact
CH2 CC2
H - 16 H - 16
103 t
t
10 t
228 220
220
226 102
104 208
0Vcc
105
105
106
H-5 M-5
t
220 220
S S
2 208 208
B B
102 102
CC1
H - 16
+24
120
STOP
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
2.2.7.2. With emergency electric control unit
CH2 CC2
H - 16 H - 16
103 t
t
10 t
228 220
220
226 102
104 208
0Vcc
105
105
106
H-5 M-5
t
202 220
S S
2 208 208
B B
302 102
CC1
H - 16
+24
120
STOP
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
302
202
RD
202 Connect to
302 a speed governor
cable voltage contact

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2.8. Travelling cables connection
Travelling cables electrically connect the controller to the car, to the inspection box, and the control station and other
elements.
These cables are wrapped in such a way that the connectors remaining outside the reel are those to be connected in
the car and at the end of the controller. An adhesive label at each end identifies the element to which it must be
connected.
Firstly, the external end of the reel will have to be thrown into the shaft, and afterwards unroll the rope in such a way
that it hangs straight down through the shaft. (Perform the same operation with all travelling cables).
After that, fasten provisionally the cables at their outlet to the shaft, so that there is no tugging on the connectors.
Connect these to the controller, as indicated in the enclosed diagram.
Controller
MicroBASIC board
CC1 CC2 CC3
109111 112113114 115116117 118119120 +24 A B C D 2 0Vdc 00 203106207 105217+12F208102 9 220 t 103 218 0Vp223 222 221
Control station Inspection box

travelling cable travelling cable
ADRJ11
210 212 211 212 RBF RBN
TFN TS1 TS2 281 280 240 206 205 204 0~ 220 U V W t R S T
CCA_ CAC XRB'
CCA_ CCTF CAC XRB'
TFNTFN 210 212 211 212 RBFRBN
Other auxiliary
connectors
Inspection box travelling cable
See section 2.2.5.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.2.9. Connection of shaft-controller installation
Controller
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 213 217 218 215 294 214 105 0Vdc104 226 220 228 10 t 103 5
CH1 CH2 MicroBASIC board
110111112113114115116117118119120+24 A B C D 2132172182152942141050Vdc10422622022810 t 103 5
Shaft installation
ADRJ11
210 212 211 212 CA NOANCARBFRBN
U V W t R S T
CHA_ CHTF CAH
TFN TFN 210 212 211 212 CA NOANCARBFRBN
Shaft installation
There are an identified wires, which can be found according to the requirements or options of the installation, are:
• All installations:
< 208 - CC2. There are one wire in the controller and one wire from the shaft installation with this label must
be connect to 208 of CC2.
• In installations with emergency electric control unit:
< 11x/S - CC1

< 11_/B - CC1
• In installations with double row of magnets:

< 203 - CC2
• In installations with fire-brigade operation:

< 10 - CH1
< 9 - CC1 (in case of fire-brigade keyswitch in car)
• In installations with imminent departure, coming light, gong at each floor, multiplexed display:
< A - CH1
< B - CH1
< C - CH1
< D - CH1

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• In installations with approach with open doors:

< 00 - CC2
• In installations compliant with DM236 (Italy):

< 105 - CH1
• Besides:
< Other wires may be connected if installation so requires. In this case, they should be indicated in the specific
documentation of each installation.
< In all cases, two wires should be connected to each of the terminals indicated, that wired at the factory and
the identified wire to be connected by the installer himself.
2.3. Car installation
2.3.1. Fastening travelling cables to car-frame base
Fasten travelling cables to the frame or car base, as shown in the figure. Make sure the ropes form a 25 to 35 cm
diameter arch and then lift the end to the car roof going through the top hat section to secure control station.
2.3.2. Mounting the inspection box
The inspection box must be fixed to the frame upright, using the support supplied within the IP5, as shown in the
figure.
Frame upright
Inspection box

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.3. Installing magnetic switches
Mount the magnetic switch on the corresponding support, supplied within the IP5, and fasten it to the guide shoe
support or to the frame, as indicated in the figure, so that the distance between the ends of the magnetic switch box
and the base of the guide rail is less than 2 cm. If there are two magnetic switches, mount one on each guide shoe or
each side of the frame.
Magnetic
Guide Guide switches
Magnetic switches
Magnetic switch
support
Magnetic switch
support
2.3.4. Installation of additional lighting on the car roof
Mount the luminaire on the corresponding support, supplied within the IP5, and fasten it on one of the ends of the door
operator (preferably on the end closest to the inspection box, to minimize the wiring trace on the car roof).

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.5. Installation of the skid actuating final limit switches and terminal stopping switches
If it is an electrical lift, first mount the magnet actuating magnetic terminal stopping switches with its corresponding
support on the skid. If the layout of the installation allows final limit switches and terminal stopping switches to be
fastened to the guide rails, fasten the skid to the frame, using the two 50 cm angles and the flanges necessary, as
shown in the left-hand figure. If the position of terminal stopping switches and terminal stopping switches, or the frame
construction, do not allow the fastening of the skid to the frame, fasten the skid on the car roof, also using one or both
angles.
If it is an hydraulic lift, the skid supplied will be smaller and it should be fastened preferably on the head, while the
magnet with its corresponding support, should be fastened on the frame.
The right-hand figure shows an example of the assembly of skid and magnet in a hydraulic lift.
ELECTRIC LIFT HYDRAULIC LIFT
Skid
Skid
Head
Magnet actuating
terminal stopping
switch
Magnet actuating
terminal stopping
switch
Once all these elements are installed, take the vertical distance between the magnetic
switch (324, 325 or 327) and the magnet actuating terminal stopping switches located on the skid (see the following
figure) as a reference for the future installation of magnets in the shaft (point 2.4.4.).
Magnetic switch
This figure represents an electric lift,

where the magnet actuating
terminal stopping switches is
fixed to the skid.
In hydraulic lifts, the magnet is
fixed somewhere else, but
this distance is also to be taken.
Magnet actuating
terminal stopping
switch

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.6. Inspection box wiring and car elements
Once all elements have been fastened, the electrical connections should be made.
The general connections at the inspection box and the elements hanging from it are shown below:
Safety gear Slack-rope
Car lighting SAC SAF

INSPECTION BOX
Magnetic switch
(it depends on the
type of installation)
see point 5.2.3
CF
+24 203 0Vdc 207
+24 203 0Vdc207
To controller cabinet
CR2 CAR CR3 CRTF Variable

2 0Vdc 203 106 207 105 217 208 102 9 220 t 218 211 212 0Vp 223 222 221 TFNTFN connection
depending
on operator
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D TFN TFN LED+ L+ C- AL1 AL2 PAP20Vdc111 11x t 217 218 +24 9BB' 2C
XRB'Operator
211212
211212
HRB'
2 0Vdc203 106 207 105 217 208 102 9 220 t 218 211 212 0Vp 223 222 221 TFN TFN
Car roof light

109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D TFN TFN LED+ L+ C- AL1 AL2 PAP20Vdc111 11x t 217 218 +24 9BB' 2C (Connection made in
CB
Travelling cable car control station)
CB1 CBTF
Car control station

NOTE:
CAR, CRTF, CF and RB’
are orange connectors
Internal wiring of the inspection box can be found in point 5.2.2 of this dossier.
Below are detailed other elements in the car.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.7. Photocell connection
2.3.7.1. Static photocell connection
• Single landing.
0Vdc +24Vdc 2 PAP2
Door
sensitivity
contact
0V +24 NO COM NC
Inspection box
0 V +24 OUT
EMITTER (SMT-3000C)
BROWN: +24V
222REV XF1 BLUE: 0V
YELLOW: 0V
RECEIVER (SMR-3106)
BROWN: +24V
BLUE: 0V
BLACK: OUT
0V +24 OUT
OUT Black
Do not connect +24 Brown RECEIVER
yellow wire 0V Blue
+24 Brown
0V Blue
EMITTER
Yellow
• Double landing
From inspection box

XF1 Photocell 1
OUT OUT Black
OUT OUT
+24 +24 Brown
+24 +24 RECEIVER
0V 0V 0V Blue
0V
+24 Brown
0V Blue EMITTER
Do not connect
Yellow
yellow wire
From inspection box

XF2 Photocell 2
OUT OUT OUT OUT Black
+24 +24 Brown RECEIVER
+24 +24
0V 0V 0V Blue
0V
+24 Brown
0V Blue
Do not connect EMITTER
Yellow
yellow wire
DIFERENT TYPES CONNECTIONS:

MP:
0Vdc: blue
24C: red
OUT: white
TELCO (represented by defect):
0vdc: blue
24C: brown
OUT: black
(Yellow not connected)
MEMCO:
0Vdc: orange
24C: red

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.7.2. No static photocell connection (free contacts voltage)
• Single landing.
PAP2 Green
2 Green Green Door sensitivity
Photocell
+24 White/blue +24Vdc
+24 +24
CEL CEL
0Vdc CEL CEL
White 0Vdc 0Vdc 0Vdc
Inspection box
• Double landing.
PAP2 Green
PAP2' Green Green
Door 1 sensitivity
Photocell 1

+24 +24
CEL CEL
0Vdc CEL CEL
White
0Vdc 0Vdc 0Vdc
PAP2' Green
2 Green Green Door 2 sensitivity
Photocell 2

+24 +24
CEL CEL
0Vdc CEL CEL
Inspection box
Supplied with 24Vdc and a free voltage contact output.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.8. Operator wiring

Colours:
2.3.8.1. Single-phase operator
v: green
az: blue
b: white
• Single landing
b/a: white/blue
Inspection box r:red
m: brown
Single-phase n; black
n na: orange
Operator MP 1 221
1 1 v/a: green/yellow
g
2 2 2
3 3 3
g
CR3
4 4 4 n
221
FCCP r
5 5 5 222 r Inspection box
222
travelling cable
6 6 6 az
223
FCAP
7 az
7 7 223 na
v 0Vp
8 8 8 PAP2
SEN
9 v 2
9 9
10 m 105 Connect on
10 10
SPC m inspection box rail
11 11 11 106
221: Common (220 Vac)

222: Closing signal (0 Vac)
223: opening signal (0 Vac)
• Double landing
2-PAP2: reopening doors ( 24 Vdc series)
105-106: doors series (110 Vac series)
Inspection box
1 Single-phase n 221
1 1
Operator MP 2
g
2
3 3
g
CR3
4 4 n
r 221
5 222 r
5
222 Inspection box
6 6
223
az travelling cable
7 7 az 223
0Vp
na
8 8
9 9
10
m 105
10 Connect on
11 m 106
11 inspection box rail
v/a t Double
landing
CDE-1 CDE-1 box
r 2221 r
2 Single-phase n 2221
1 1 221 az 2231 az
2231
Operator MP 2 2
g
r
g 222 222 r
3 3 n n
221 221
4 4 b
r 0Vdc 0Vdc b
5 5 222 b/a +24 +24 b/a
6 6 na 0Vp 0Vp na
7 az
7 223 az 223 223 az
8 8 az 2232 2232 az
9 9 r 2222 2222 r
10
m
10 105
11 m 106
11
v/a
t

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.8.2. Single-phase power supply operator + cam signal
• Single landing
- PUARSA
Inspection box
Operator
1
2
CR3
r
3-4: closing signal 3 222
5-6: photoelectric cell, n
sensibility
4 n
v 221
7-8: Supply 5 PAP2 r Inspection box
10-12: Safety series v 222 travelling cable
6 2
az
na 223
7 0Vp
na
n 0Vp
8 221
9 Connect on
m inspection box rail
10 105
11
m
12 106
221: Common (220 Vac)

222: Closing signal (0 Vac)
223: opening signal (0 Vac)
2-PAP2: reopening doors ( 24 Vdc series)
105-106: doors series (110 Vac series)
• REVECO II
Inspection box
Reveco II
Operator
C4 C4
C3 C3
C2 n
C1-C2: closing signal
C2
C1
r
222
CR3
OB2-OBX: photoelectric C1 n
v/a t 221
cell,sensibility t t
V1-V2: Supply na 222 r
V2 OVp
105-106: Safety series V2 az Inspection box
n 223
V1 V1 221 travelling cable
v na
OBX OBX 2 0Vp
v PAP2
OB2 OB2
Connect on
inspection box rail
105 m
105
m
XPC
106 106 Colours:
v: green
az: blue
b: white
b/a: white/blue
r:red
m: brown
n; black
na: orange
v/a: green/yellow

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Double landing
- PUARSA
Inspection box
Operator 1 1
2
r
3
n
222 CR3
4 n
v 221
5 PAP2 r
6
v
2
222 Inspection box
az
na
0Vp 223 travelling cable
7 na
n 0Vp
8 221
9
m
10 105
11 Connect on
m Inspection box rail
12 106
1
Operator 2
2 Double
3
r
222 CDE-1 CDE-1 landing
n
4 n 222 n box
v 1 2221
5 PAP2 na 0Vp na
v 0Vp
6 2 b/a +24 b/a
na +24
7 0Vp b 0Vdc b
n 0Vdc
8 221 r r
222 222
9 r 222 r
m 2 222 2
10 105
11
m
12 106
- REVECO II
Colours:
v: green
az: blue
Inspection box b: white
b/a: white/blue
Operator 1 C4 C4 r:red
C3 C3
C2
m: brown
C2
C1 C1 222 n; black
t t t na: orange
V2 V2 OVp v/a: green/yellow
V1 V1 221
OBX OBX 2
OB2 OB2 PAP2
105 105
XPC
106 106
Operator 2 Double
C4 C4
landing
C3 C3
C2 CDE-1 CDE-1 box
C2
C1 C1 222
2221 2221
t t t
0Vp 0Vp
V2 V2 OVp
+24 +24
V1 V1 221
0Vdc 0Vdc
OBX OBX 2
222 222
OB2 OB2 PAP2
222 2 2222
105 105
XPC
106 106

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.8.3. Direct current operator
• Single landing
Inspection box
Connect on na
Inspection box rail na FCCP1
220~
na 0Vp 0Vp
na na
233 233
na 234 234 FCAP1
g g
237 237
n U1 U1
Inspection box r V1 V1 n
az
travelling cable W1 W1
r M
CR3' CR3'
Operator
Colours:
v: green
az: blue
b: white
b/a: white/blue
r:red
• Double landing m: brown
n; black
na: orange
v/a: green/yellow
FCCP2
na
Inspection box 231
FCAP2
g
235
na
234
g
235'
n
U2
b/a
na
M2 Operator 2
g
b
r
235' 0Vdc +24 234237' V2
na FCCP1
CDE-1 233
FCAP1
g
237
CDE-1 na
g
237'
235' 0Vdc +24 234237'
n
U1
b/a
na
g
b
Operator 1
M1
r
V1
CR3' CR3'
231 231 na
235 235 g
U2 U2 n
V2 V2
r
Double az
landing box
W2 W2
0Vp 0Vp na Inspection box
233 233 na travelling cable
234 234 na
237 237 g
U1 U1
n
V1 V1
r
W1 W1 az

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.8.4. Three-phase operator
• Single landing
Inspection box
na
FCCP1
na 220~
na 0Vp 0Vp
na na
233 233
Inspection box na 234 234 FCAP1
g g
travelling cable 237 237
n U1 U1
r V1 V1 n
az W1 W1
r
CR3' CR3' M~ Operator
az
• Double landing
na FCCP2
231
g FCAP2
Inspection box 235
na
234
g
235'
b/a
n
na
U2
g
b
r
235' 0Vdc+24 234 237' V2 M2 Operator 2
az ~
W2
CDE-1
na FCCP1
233
CDE-1 FCAP1
g
237
na
235' 0Vdc+24 234 237' g
b/a
237'
na
g
b
n
U1
V1 r
M1 Operator 1
az ~
W1
CR3' CR3'
231 231 na
235 235 g
U2 U2 n
V2 V2 r
W2 W2 az
Double na
0Vp 0Vp
landing box 233 233 na Inspection box
234 234 na travelling cable
237 237 g
U1 U1 n
V1 r
V1 az
W1 W1
Colours:
v: green
az: blue
b: white
b/a: white/blue
r:red
m: brown
n; black
na: orange
v/a: green/yellow

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.9. Installing and connecting double landing box
If it is a double landing installation, an additional box will be located on the car roof, connected to the inspection box
and to the additional magnetic switch which provides signals determining which operators operate on each floor. The
connections to be made will be of different types, and at the same time auxiliary magnets will have to be installed (for
the previous magnetic switch), depending on the type of double landing.
• Double landing, type 1:

Operator 1 (OP 1) operates on some floors and operator 2 (OP 2) operates on the remaining floors. They do not coincide
at any floor.
Magnets should be placed at the floors where operator 2 is to operate.
Signal Operator enabled
1
A 2
A
OP 1 OP 2
Operator 1 (OP 1) operates on all floors. Operator 2 (OP 2) operates on some floors. They coincide at the floors where
operator 2 actuates.
Magnets should be placed where both operators must operate simultaneously.
A A 1, 2
Connect to
inspection box
OP 1 OP 2

Operator 1 (OP 1) operates on some floors and operator 2 (OP 2) works on the remaining floors. They do coincide at
some floors.
Some magnets should be placed where both operators must simultaneously operate, and others where only operator 2
(OP 2) operates, in such a way that signals A2 or A1 are activated respectively.
A2 1
A1 2
A1
A2 1, 2
OP 1 OP 2

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
For double landing type 1 and type 2, connections will be made according to the left-hand figure, regardless of the
operator type, while in case of double landing type 3, connection will be made according to the figure on the right.
Connectors CDE-1 and CDE-2 depend on the type of operator and photocell respectively.
( CDE - 1 ) ( CDE - 1 )
Connect to Connect to
inspection box inspection box
DE_--_ DE_--_
(CDE-2) (CDE-2)
Connect to Connect to
inspection box inspection box
C - 327
MAC 324 MAC 327
C - 324 A2
A1
A
2.3.10. Installing and connecting an additional stop button
If it is a double landing installation, and it has an additional stop button, fasten on one of the ends of the door operator,
that farthest from the inspection box, as shown in the figure.
Additional STOP button
From inspection box

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.11. Installing and connecting load weighing device
2.3.11.1. Power unit LM3D + bedframe sensors CCP + display DSC or led
Car control
216 216 station
Control station
travelling cable 216: Complete output signal
Display DSC
or led
CBA_ CBA_
+24 Vdc
2.3.11.2. Power unit LM3D + bedframe sensors CCP + display MICELET
D+, D-: Display signals

Car control
D+ D+ station
Control station
D- D-
travelling cable Display
MICELET
CBA_ CBA_
2.3.11.3. Load pressure switch + display DSC or led
Car control
216 216 station 216: Complete output signal
Control station
travelling cable
Display DSC
or led
CBA_ CBA_
+24 Vdc
2.3.11.4. Mechanical + display DSC or led
Connect to
load weighing
device
+24 91 107
CPS
Car control
station
CPS
CCS CCS +24 91 107
Control station
91 91
216 216
Display DSC
or led
+24 Vdc

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.11.5. ILC2 or ILC3 + display DSC or led
Connect to
load weighing
device
+24 91 107 0Vdc
CPS
CPS
Car control
station +24 91 107 0Vdc
CCS CCS
91 91
Control station 107 107
0Vdc
Display DSC
+24 Vdc or led
2.3.11.6. ILC3 + display MICELET
Connect to
load weighing
device
+24 91 107 0Vdc D+ D-
CPS CPD
CPS CPD
Car control
station
+24 91 107 0Vdc D+ D-
CCS CCS
91 91 Display
Control station MICELET
216 216
0Vdc
+24 Vdc

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.11.7. Power unit LMCAB + load sensors CAB + display DSC or led
Connection
terminal
221 - brown
t - green/yellow
0Vp - blue
Connect to
load weighing
device
+24 91 107
CPS
Car control
station
CPS
CCS +24 91 107

CCS
91 91
Control station 107 107
travelling cable
216 216
Display DSC
or led
+24 Vdc
2.3.11.8. Power unit LM3D + load sensors CAB + display MICELET
Connection
terminal
221 - brown
t - green/yellow
0Vp - blue
Connect to
load weighing
device
+24 91 107 D+ D-
CPS CPD
Car control
station
CPS CPD
CCS +24 91 107 D+ D-

CCS
91 91
Control station
107 107
travelling cable Display
216 216
MICELET
+24 Vdc

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.11.9. VK-2P + progressive display MB-D
Firstly, fix the load weighing device on the frame upright, using the support supplied with the same.
The general connection of the load weighing device installation is shown below:
AL-C
AL-S MENU
AUX
SERIE VK
MACPUARSA
LOAD WEIGHING DEVICE

VK-2P ON CAR ROOF SENSOR RS-485 AL-C AL-S
Kg
VK-2P
2 220 Vac HOLD

6
1 4
MALLA
EXC +
EXC -
3 5 - +
+ IN
- IN
T1 T2
Connectors inversely
plugged, turning around
MALLA -IN +IN EXC-EXC+ S6 S4 C3 C1 T2 T1 D+ D- INH INH 220 0Vp
Load cells
2m tube 25cm tube
Control station
travelling cable
CBC_ CBC_ Car control station
T1 T1
T2 T2
0Vdc 0Vp
XPC XPC
CCS_ CCS_
Inspection
+24 +24 220 INH
91 91 91 91 box
107 107 107 107 CRA_
216 216
XDSC XDSC
Control station Display
travelling cable MB-D D- D-
Kg
D+ D+
CRA_
220 INH
Inspection box
travelling cable

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.3.12. Car control station connection
To load weighing device To inspection box
107 91 +24 - 2C 9/BB' +24 218 217 t S/11x B/111 PAP2 0Vdc AL2 AL1 C- L+ LED+ TFN TFN
XPC CB CBTF
107 91 +24 - 2C 9/BB' +24 218 217 t S/11x B/111 PAP2 0Vdc AL2 AL1 C- L+ LED+ TFN TFN
CAR CONTROL STATION
91 107 216 109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120+24 A B C D
CCS CB1
91 107 216 109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120+24 A B C D
Control station
travelling cable
2.4. Shaft installation
2.4.1. Installation of travelling cable supports
Two fixing elements are supplied within the IP5; the first one will be placed at the headroom and the second one
halfway up the shaft.
Fasten the bases to the wall using the wall plugs and screws supplied within the IP5. Then, pass the cables through the
interior of the bases and fasten introducing the wedges. Press down until the assemble is as shown in the figure.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.4.2. Shaft wiring installation
First of all, fasten the shaft raceways (IP6) to the wall using the screws and plugs of the figure and then fix the cable bundle
of the shaft installation (IP4), which will be fixed to the raceway, once the latter has been installed with the help of black
fasteners.
Also mount the string of lights, fastening each of the luminaires supplied.
Screw
Plug Fastener
2.4.3. Installation and connection of shaft elements
First mount final limit switches and terminal stopping switches on their corresponding supports, supplied within the IP5. Then
mount them on the 50 cm angles and fasten the sets to the guide rails at the convenient height, as shown in the figure. If,
due to the installation layout, it is not possible to fasten these elements to the guide rails, fasten them directly to the shaft
wall, using wall plugs and screws supplied within IP5. Always take into account that final limit switches must act 5 cm after
the lift has surpassed upper and lower landings and before the car or the counterweight make contact with pit buffers. Also
bear in mind that operation of terminal stopping switches must start shortly after the speed change on upper and lower
landings. For that purpose, difference in heights between the terminal stopping switch and the pulse magnet must be
approximately 2cm higher than the difference in heights between the magnetic switch and the magnet actuating terminal
stopping switch, which are previously installed on the frame (see point 2.3.5.).
Final limit switch
Angles
Terminal stopping switch
Guide
Then install landing control stations, using the parts supplied together with landing doors, as shown in the figure.
Upright
Control station
Control station box
Control station box

fixing plate

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Finally, position the shaft pit box, fastening it directly to the wall with wall plugs and screws.
Perform all connections according to the following diagram:
CAH XRB' CHA_ CH2 CHTF CH1 CC2
Connections in
controller
211 212 CA NOA NCA TFN TFN RL1 RL2 CRL 105 0Vdc 104 226 220 228 103 TFN TFN +24 208
Shaft lighting
XRB
Speed governor
XLV contact
Speed governor
RL1 RL2 CRL
XRLV
RL1 RL2 CRL
remote operation

XTL'
voltage contact
WARNING:
(in case of double contact)
ALL CONNECTIONS
MUST TO BE PLACED
UNDER CONDUIT
Hatch contact
XCT
Upper final
XFC
limit switch
XAFS
0 +24 228
0 +24 228
Upper terminal
stopping switch
Door series contact

XCA;XCE
(one per landing)
Landing control station

BO
(one per landing)
Lower terminal
0 +24 226
XAFI
0 +24 226
stopping switch
Lower final
XFC
limit switch
XTL

voltage contact
211 212 CA NOA NCA
211 212 CA NOA NCA
TC
CAF
SAHF
Pit box
t
XCTS
STOPF
t 103 +24 208
103 +24 208
CFTF
TFN TFN
TFN TFN

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.4.4. Magnet installation
When installing the magnets, special care must be taken with regards to their position in relation to the magnetic
switches, situating the magnets faces properly maintaining the indicated distances. Always follow the guidelines below:
• Clean the guide previously.

• Do not use any kind of glue.
• Do not place them near the speed governor cable.
• Fix the magnets on the base of the guide. If this is not possible because the position of one of the magnets
coincides with one of the guide fastening bolts, install the magnet on the guide core (see attached figures), in such
a way that it does not interfere with guide shoes or the safety gear.
• The distance between the magnet and the magnetic switch end must be 2 cm max. (see left figure). In case of
high-core guides, in which this condition is not met with the magnet stuck on the base, place the magnet on the
core as in the previous case.
• Always attach the magnets to the guide by their north side, except for the case of impulse magnets with magnetic
switch 326, where the magnets should be attached by their south side. The north side is marked with a
longitudinal groove, as shown in the figure.
North side South side

< 2cm
Magnet south side
Guide
Magnet
Guide
Fixing screws
Magnet

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
The first thing to bear in mind upon magnet installation is the criterion applied by the control unit for speed change
before stopping, what we call type of change.
The type of change will depend on the distance between floors, speed and type of lift.
Vía Serie control unit provides four types of change, which are represented in the following figure:
A Change 1C: the change is made with the magnet that is closest to the level. There are two magnets per landing,
one for ascent and one for descent.
A Change 2C: the change is made with the second magnet previous to the level. There are also two magnets per
landing, one for ascent and one for descent.
A Chance 1P: the change is made with the magnet that is closest to the level. There is only one magnet per landing.
A Change 3C: the change is made with the magnet previous to the previous level. This type of change is not possible
in two consecutive landings. The run between consecutive landings is made in slow speed or with second speed in case
of 3VF.
N N N N
1 1 1 2
y
>=0.4m >=0.4m
P P = P
y y
P
L L >=0.4m L L P >=0.4m Standar
P P
y y
floor 2C
>=0.2m Pa
y =
N
>=0.4m N N
>=0.4m N
0 0 0 1
= P
y
Short
Lc
CHANGE 1C CHANGE 2C CHANGE 1P y floor
= N
0
>=0.4m
P Pa
y
CHANGE 3C L P >=0.4m Standar

y floor 2C
>=0.4m N
-1
The type of change selection table for each type of lift according to speed and distance between floors is shown below.
A 1 speed electric lift

SPEED (m/s)
v = 0.63m/s
0.63 1C y = 0.4m
1.00
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00
DISTANCE BETWEEN FLOOR (m)
APPLICATION RANGE:
MODE OF OPERATION:
L >= 1m: CHANGE 1C
CHANGE 1C: Speed change with 2nd pulse screen,
y = 0.4 according to the direction of the service.
1
KEY: MACHINE ROOM CONNECTIONS:
y P
y = braking distance Signal P is connected to terminal 203 of group CC2.

L
L = distance between floors
y P >=0.2m P = pulse screen

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Ascensor eléctrico de 2 velocidades y ascensor oleodinámico

º
1.20 3C 1P 2C * 1C v = 1.20m/s
y = 1.50m
1.50 1.90 2.60 3.20
1.00 3C 1P 2C * 1C v = 1.00m/s
y = 1.20m
1.20 1.60 2.00 2.60
SPEED (m/s)
0.80 3C 1P 2C * 1C v = 0.80m/s
y = 1.00m
1.00 1.40 1.60 2.20
0.63 3C 1P 2C* 1C v = 0.63m/s

y = 0.8m
0.50 0.80 1.20 1.80
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00
CHANGE 3C CHANGE 1P
N N CHANGE 2C N CHANGE 1C N
2 1 1 1
>=0.4m >=0.4m y
P = P P
y y
P
Floor L P >=0.4m L L P >=0.4m L P
y y
Pa = >=0.2m
>=0.4m >=0.4m y
N N N N
1 0 0 0
= P
Lc y
y
Short
= N
floor
0
>=0.4m FZS
P Pa
y = FS
L P >=0.4m FB
Floor
y C E D
>=0.4m N =
-1
OPERATION MODE:
APPLICATION RANGE: CHANGE 1C: Speed change with the first pulse (P) previous to the landing.
L < y: CHANGE 3C CHANGE 2C: Speed change with the second pulse (P) previous to the
y < L <= y + 0.4: CHANGE 1P landing.
y + 0.4 < L <= 2y + 0.4: CHANGE 2C
2y + 0.4 < L < 2y + 0.2: CHANGE 2C* CHANGE 1P: Speed change with the previous level (N) in runs between
L >= 2y + 0.2: CHANGE 1C non-consecutive landings.
In runs between consecutive landings speed is slow.
* Range where change 2C is applied, increasing
braking distance on the basis of: CHANGE 3C: In runs between non-consecutive landings speed change is
made with the additional pulse (Pa).
y' = (L + 0.4) / 2 In runs between consecutive landings speed is slow.
This type of change is not possible between several consecutive landings.
KEY: Change 3C is possible in upper and lower landings. In this case the terminal
stopping switch must be placed at the height of the additional pulse (Pa).
y = braking distance
y' = increased braking distance
Lc = short distance between floors OPERATION MODE:
N = level screen (or magnet)
P = pulse screen (or magnet) 1.-On parameters From 49 to 63 it will be
Pa = additional pulse screen (or magnet) introduced the type of change to applied
FB = re-levelling screen in descent
FS = re-levelling screen in ascent MACHINE ROOM CONNECTIONS:
FZS = safety area
Signal N is connected to terminal 207 of group CC2.
In hydraulic lifts, level signal is composed of the Signal P is connected to terminal 203 of group CC2.
intersection of other two, FB and FS, which Signal Pa is connected, according to type of installation, to the following
overlap in D, within the safety area. terminals:
119-CC1, 120-CC1, 120CH1.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Frequency variation electric lift
v = 1.60m/s
1.60 3C 1P 2C * 1C y = 2.40m
2.40 2.80 4.40 5.00
v = 1.40m/s
1.40 3C 1P 2C * 1C y = 2.20m
2.20 2.60 4.00 4.60
SPEED(m/s)
v = 1.20m/s
1.20 3C 1P 2C * 1C y = 2.00m
2.00 2.40 3.60 4.20
v = 1.00m/s
1.00 3C 1P 2C * 1C y = 1.55m
1.55 1.90 2.70 3.30
v = 0.80m/s
0.80 3C 1P 2C * 1C y = 1.20m
1.20 1.60 2.00 2.60
v = 0.63m/s
0.63 3C 1P 2C* 1C y = 0.8m
0.50 0.80 1.20 1.80
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00
CHANGE 3C N CHANGE 1P N CHANGE 2C N CHANGE 1C N

2 1 1 1
>=0.4m >=0.4m
= y
P P P
y P y
Floor L P >=0.4m L L P >=0.4m L P
y y
Pa = >=0.2m
>=0.4m >=0.4m y
N N N N
1 0 0 0
= P
Short Lc y
y
Floor
= N
0
>=0.4m
P Pa
y
L P >=0.4m OPERATION MODE:
Floor
y
>=0.4m CHANGE 1C: Speed change with the first pulse (P) previous to the landing.
N
-1
CHANGE 2C: Speed change with the second pulse (P) previous to the
landing.
APPLICATION RANGE: Non-MP inverter operates with second speed in runs between consecutive
landings.
L < y: CHANGE 3C
y < L <= y + 0.4: CHANGE 1P CHANGE 1P: Speed change with the previous level (N) in runs between
y + 0.4 < L <= 2y + 0.4: CHANGE 2C non-consecutive landings.
2y + 0.4 < L < 2y + 0.2: CHANGE 2C* In runs between consecutive landings, start-up in second speed and change
L >= 2y + 0.2: CHANGE 1C with intermediary pulse (P) .
Not applicable to non-MP inverter.
* Range where change 2C is applied, increasing braking
distance on the basis of: CHANGE 3C: In runs between non-consecutive landings speed change is
made with the additional pulse (Pa).
y' = (L + 0.4) / 2 In runs between consecutive landings, start-up in second speed and change
with intermediary pulse (P).
KEY: This type of change is not possible in several consecutive landings.
Change 3C is possible in upper and lower landings. In this case terminal
y = braking distance stopping switch is installed at the height of the additional pulse (Pa).
y' = increased braking distance Not applicable to non-MP inverter.
Lc = distance between short floors OPERATION MODE:
N = level screen (or magnet)
P = pulse screen (or magnet) 1.-On parameters From 49 to 63 it will be introduced the type of change to
Pa = additional pulse screen (or magnet) applied
MACHINE ROOM CONNECTIONS:
Signal N is connected to terminal 207 of group CC2.

Signal P is connected to terminal 203 of group CC2.
Signal Pa is connected, according to type of installation, to
the following terminals:
119-CC1, 120-CC1, 120CH1.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Next figure shows the different possible configurations of magnetic switches / rows of magnets, according to the type of
lift.
FZS
N
1
FS FB
P P P
P P P
FS FB N
0
328 327 325 324
FS 0Vdc FB P 24G 0Vdc FZS P 24G N P 24G
VEH NL
Where:
324: Only for 1-speed installations

325: For electric installations with no approach with doors open
327 y 328: For electric installations with approach with doors open and hydraulic installations with open door re-
levelling.
FB: re-levelling signal in descent

FS: re-levelling signal in ascent
FZS: safety area signal
N: level signal
NL: emergency level signal
P: pulse signal
Where cylindrical magnetic switches are used, instead of MP switches, equivalences would be as follows:
324: 1 switch 1 NO contact

325: 1 switch 1 NO contact + 1 switch 1 NC contact
327: 2 switches 1 NO contact
328: 1 switch 1 NO contact + 1 switch (1 NO contact + NC contact)

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Lastly, magnet layout in the different approach / re-levelling cases with doors open is described below.
FZS
FS FB
NUMBER OF MAGNETS FS FB FZS S

PER SCREEN
ELECTRIC V=1.4 m/s 1 x 150 mm 1 x 150 mm 4 x 100 mm 100 mm
ELECTRIC V>1.4 m/s 2 x 100 mm 2 x 100 mm 4 x 150 mm 150 mm
HYDRAULIC 1 x 100 mm 1 x 100 mm 3 x 100 mm 50 mm
Where:
FB: re-levelling signal in descent.

FS: re-levelling signal in ascent.
FZS: safety area screen.
S: Overlap.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.5. Labelling
Together with the documents of each installation, you will find a labels sheet in the target language of the said
installation, for the purpose of identifying its most important elements. The procedure of positioning each label is shown
below.
INSPECTION BOX DOUBLE LANDING BOX VOICE SYNTHESIZER INTERCOM SET PIT BOX
1 CDE CSV
5 6
SIR SPRB SPRS STOP
220/240 Vac
12
2 SPRC SACP 3
13 STOP
EMERGENCY ELECTRIC
CONTROL UNIT BOX
MES
20 SIR' STOP' 1
STOP
17
SPRB' SPRS'
4 19 18 16
2 3 4
ELECTRIC CONTROLLER*
INSIDE OF ELECTRIC
CABINET DOOR 5 6 7 8
26 24
11 9 10 11 12 13
S S
L L
V C
ARL
25 23
14 15
16 17 18
! STOP
!
19 20
SIDE OF
FRONT OF ELECTRIC CABINET 21 22
ELECTRIC CABINET
! ! ! !
VNIVEL
14
8
BTST VALARMA
7 15
SDI
10 23 24
SALH
25 26
STOP STOP
* The position of the speed governor pushbutton may vary depending on the type of installation.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.6. Specific assembly guidelines for installations with speed variation
Installations with speed variation, by their own constitution, are a source electromagnetic noise.
To respect the rest of the installations that exist or may exist in the building, the following installation guidelines must
be followed strictly.
If these guidelines are not followed, the installation of the lift may cause many interference problems, preventing the
electronic devices existing in the building (PC, radio, radio ham, TV, medical equipments, etc.) from operating properly
and violating the regulations in force.
2.6.1. Special elements for VVVF installations
Make sure the following material is supplied:
INPUT FILTER, LOCATED UNDER THE

FREQUENCY INVERTER. IT HAS 2
OUTPUTS, ONE FOR THE INVERTER
POWER SUPPLY, AND THE OTHER FOR
THE CONTROL UNIT
IP-1 OUTPUT FILTER, TOROID LOCATED AT

THE U,V,W OUTPUT OF THE INVERTER
2 SPLIT FERRITES, THE LARGEST FIXED

ON THE U,V,W OUTPUT OF THE
INVERTER, BEFORE THE OUTPUT FILTER,
AND THE OTHER ONE FIXED ROUND THE
BRAKING RESISTOR WIRES.
SUPPLY TO SCREENED TRACTION

MACHINE, WITH ALUMINUM CLAMPS AND
SELF-TAPPING SCREWS TO FASTEN THE
EARTH MESH TO THE CONTROL PANEL
AND THE MACHINE.
IP-2
SET OF CLAMPS, WASHERS AND SELF-
TAPPING SCREWS TO FASTEN THE EARTH
MESHES OF COMMUNICATION WIRES (IF
ANY) AND THE ENCODER.
RING TERMINAL, WITH SELF-TAPPING

SCREW TO FASTEN THE R,S,T SUPPLY
EARTH TO THE SHEET PLATE OF THE
CONTROL PANEL.
BRAKING RESISTOR LOCATED ON THE

IP-3 SIDE OF THE CABINET.
BEING WIRE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE
X4

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.6.2. Connection of the machine power supply
The traction machine power supply, as specified in the previous section, must be carried out with screened wires.
Earthing of the controller should be made connecting the earth cable to the plate with the ring terminal and self-tapping
screw (also supplied), using the hole located next to terminals R,S,T.
Self-tapping screw
Ring terminal Controller plate
Mains supply earth connection
Connection at the controller should be made according to the following diagrams, depending on the wire section:
V t
U
Controller U
plate t V
W
Self-tapping screw
W
Controller plate
Self-tapping screws
Mesh Mesh
Washer
Washers
Motor supply cable Motor supply cable
Mesh of this wire must be earth connected at both ends. The contact between the mesh and the plate must be the best
possible, for greatest contact surface between both of them.
RIGHT WRONG

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
The end of the machine is fastened in different ways, according to the type of machine:
< MACPUARSA PM Machines:
Terminals cover
Flange
Mesh
Sheath
< MACPUARSA PA Machines:
Mesh
Terminals cover
Mesh
Cover
< Non-MACPUARSA Machines: from the previous systems, select the one that best fits to the machine in question.
Please consult for other mesh connection systems.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.6.3. Machine room wiring
Connection from mains to the controller for power supply must be performed in such a way that the power supply cables
do not get mixed up with the control wires, nor with the output cables to the traction machine, and avoiding parallel
ways at a distance lower than 30 cm. Installation must be carried out according to the figure instructions.
< Simplex installation
Left connection Right connection
D
D 3
D 2
2
D
1
D $300 mm
1
< Duplex installation (Similar to triplex and quadruplex).
Left connection
Right connection
2 2
D D D
D D D
D D
D 2 D
2
3 2
2 3
D D
4 4
1 1
1
1
D $300 mm
1.- CONTROL AND MOTOR SUPPLY (U,V,W)

2.- MAINS SUPPLY (R,S,T,t)
3.- GENERAL PROTECTION BOX
4.- COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CONTROLLERS

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Once all the wires have been pulled through the lower opening of the panel, and contained within the raceways,
following the previous figures indications, mount the bended cover supplied with the cabinet, in such a way that the
wires coming out of the cabinet are totally protected. See figure.
The wires must be protected by raceways and the wire sections connecting to the motor, not inside the raceway, must
be protected with the corrugated tube supplied with the connection. One tube goes with control wires and the other
tube, with power wires.
• The lighting connection from the mains to the controller should be performed as indicated in the first paragraph
of the previous section.
Should this not be possible, use two 2x1,5 mm” screened wires (one for the shaft and another for the car), fastening
both meshes to the sheet plate with a self-tapping screw.
• In case of serial communication and/or encoder existence, these wires meshes must be fastened to the sheet
plate with clamps and self-tapping screws, similar to the fastening of the mesh of the motor supply cable.
• The braking resistor must be fastened on the right side of the cabinet using the existing drill holes, in such a
way that the electrical contact between the resistor casing and the cabinet is guaranteed.
Braking resistor
Control unit cabinet
MACPUARSA will not guarantee compliance with EMC Directive in any of the following cases:
< When the installation is carried out without taking into account the previous points.
< When products not provided by MACPUARSA are used in the installation.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.7. Assembly instructions
This document gives instructions for the assembly of magnetic contacts for totally open landing door signal.
2.7.1. Material supplied
The kit supplied for the installation of this magnetic contact includes the following material:
FIGURE DENOMINATION
1 MAGNETIC CONTACT INSTALLATION KIT
2 MAGNET SUPPORT KIT
3 MAGNET+ MAGNETIC CONTACT KIT
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
2.7.2. Magnetic sensor assembly on the support
Assemble the magnetic sensor on the sensor support as shown in the following picture, leaving a distance from the
detection end to the support plate centre:
-Doors T2H, T3H, C4H: 40 mm

-Doors C2H: 25 mm
The detection end will then be aligned with the car door track edge

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
2.7.3. Magnetic installation on the magnet support ( 1 per door)
Install each magnet on each support so that it is centred and magnetically bonded.
2.7.4. Sensor installation under the car door track
Step 1. Mount the sensor kit under the opening end of the car door track, introducing the fixing screw head through the
door track channel, until the support is hidden and flush with the opening end. Tighten fixing screws.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Step 2. Guide and fix the wire through the lower part of the door track and introduce into the top hat section for car
control station protection. Then guide it from this point to its connection point.
2.7.5. Support-magnet assembly
Step 1. Mount the support-magnet assembly at the fast panel of each landing door, fixing it to the third eyelet, to be
counted from the opening side end. (The first eyelet of the opening end remains free; the second eyelet is for the door
track support. Assemble the support-magnet on the third eyelet). See pictures below.
Step 2. Adjust a distance from the external side of magnet to the door track of landing door, which must be from 13 to
15 mm. Like this, a space from 5 to 7 mm must be left between the magnet support and the door track (or toe guard)
as to prevent the support to rub against the toe guard in door opening and closing.
If a 30mm space has been left, between landing door sill and car door sill,
distance between the magnet and the sensor (flush under the car sill) must be
between 15 and 17 mm (15<D<20). This distance must never exceed 20 mm,
since detection is not possible at a lower distance.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Step 3. Check that magnet is aligned with the sensor under the car door track,
when landing door opens completely. If necessary, move the sensor in the opening
or closing direction (on the rail under the car door track), so that they face each
other.
Step 4. Follow the above-mentioned instructions to mount the support-magnet

assembly at each landing door.
2.7.6. Assembly inspection
Finally, check in inspection control unit that magnet and sensor are aligned at each floor, when the landing door opens
completely and totally open landing door is detected.
If alignment deviation is lower than +/-12.5mm in opening and closing direction and distances between the magnet and
the sensor are lower than 20 mm (preferably between 15 and 20 mm) electric continuity must take place.
Check the sensor connector upon connection of a multimeter with this functionality.
If re-adjustment was necessary at any door, modify the magnet position.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
CHAPTER 3. COMMISSIONING
3.1. Checks
Once the installation mounting and connections have been carried out, certain check must be performed before
commissioning.
Firstly verify the installed components and check their correct positioning and location. After this first check disconnect the
controller power supply.
Checks to be carried out according to EN81-1/2 Standard are described in section F of Annex D of the same.
3.1.1. Measuring the isolation resistance of the different circuits
The following circuits should be considered for the isolation resistance tests on the IEPMBAS installation :
• CIRCUIT 1: Power supply R, S, T.
• CIRCUIT 2: Safety series; terminal 106 of connector CC2 of the MicroBASIC board.
• CIRCUIT 3: First speed; U, V, W.
• CIRCUIT 4: Depending on the model:
< For 2 speeds: second speed U1, V1, W1.
< For hydraulic lifts: X, Y, Z.
< For 3VFMAC: not available
• CIRCUIT 5: Earth
• CIRCUIT 6: Lighting, terminals 210, 211, 212, RBF, RBN, CA, NCA, NOA, of connectors CAC, RB, RB’, CAH.
These tests are carried out without power supply to the control unit nor the lighting (in case of hydraulic lifts, disconnect
QIB), with the lift parked out of floor level, the doors closed and disconnecting the following parts, depending on the model
:
• 2 speeds; earth wires connecting to:

• Terminal “5" of connector P1 located at the right side of the board.
• Terminal “t” of connector CC2.
• Terminal “t” of connector CH2.
• Hydraulic lifts; the same earth wires of the previous point and also the earth wire of the network filter, which is added
(little black box located beneath the power supply R, S, T terminals).
• Frequency variation; in this case, besides disconnecting the earth wires indicated in the previous point, the input filter
power supply cables, located at the filter LINE terminal board, must be disconnected (this filter is located under the
inverter).
These wires must be properly isolated with isolating tape.

The duration of the test will be 1 minute and test voltage will be 500V DC. The test voltage will be applied between the
following circuits :
1 2 3 4 6
5 x x x x x
1 x x x x
2 x x x
3 x x
4 x
The measured isolation resistance must be higher than or equal to 0,5 MΩ.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
3.1.2. Checking the electrical continuity
This check must be carried out between the machine room earth terminal and the different lift components which may
accidentally be put under pressure.
To perform this test, according to the HD 384.6.61 S1 harmonized standard, an equipment with the following features is
necessary :
A 24V DC or AC off-load power supply, with a minimum current of 0,2 A.

The measures obtained with this equipment between the different points must not exceed the resistance value of 0,1 Ω.
3.2. Commissioning
After the corresponding checks have been carried out, the commissioning of the installation may be carried out. For this
purpose :
A. Connect the power supply to the controller.
B. Check the correct operation of all components, specially the safety components. To this end, check all points of the
safety series. Section 1.6 shows the general diagrams of the different installation types, among which the layout of this
series is highlighted in bold letters.
C. Adjust the speed change and level magnets, as applicable.
D. General check and cleaning of the installation for its commissioning.
If any additional adjustment is necessary, it should be made on the MicroBASIC board and the inverter, if any (although
these are fully factory set).
E. Configuration of the MICROBASIC board, as indicated in chapter 4.
F. Configuration of the 3VFMAC frequency inverter, in the case of installations with speed variation, as indicated in the
corresponding technical dossier.
The machine room PCB is provided with a display, which shows useful information about possible faults in the lift operation,
as well as the state it is in. The following sections explain this kind of information.
3.3. Table with possible causes which prevent run of lift
CAUSES PREVENTING RUN OF LIFT [A or x]
OX ELEMENT
01 Series fuses blown.
02 Final limit switch open or series previous to doors.
03 Overtemperature .
04 Overload.
05 Complete.
06 Door series open.
07 Pushbuttons open (PAP, SEN, CEL).
08 Car and landing locks series open.
09 Car or landing call from the floor where the lift is on.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
3.4. Table of states of the lift elements
LIST OF STATES [E x y]
XY STATE (DIGIT DOES NOT FLICKER) XY STATE DIGIT DOES NOT FLICKER
01 Overload on. 15 Fire-brigade key switch in car, on.
02 Complete on. 16 Levelling direction in descent.
03 Car and landing locks series closed. 17 Fire-brigade key switch in shaft, on.
04 Safety area on, leveller. 18 Contactor KCS or KCR on.
05 Safety series locked (SAF, SAC, STOP, SFS, SFI, 19 Contactor KCB or KCL on.
SLV)
06 Not used. 20 FM series fuse correct.
07 Leveller closed. 21 Terminal 20 of P3 on (parameter 11).
08 Not used. 22 Return in process.
09 Lower terminal stopping switch closed. 23 Transient out of service.
10 Upper terminal stopping switch closed. 24 Permanent out of service.
11 Inspection control unit on. 25 In operation.
12 Landing presence-of-leaf contact closed. 26 Slow speed.
13 Door opening series closed (PAP, CEL,SEN) 27 End of service.
14 STOP series open (movable sill, STOP button)

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
3.5. Table of failures
XY CAUSE
LIST OF FAILURES [F x y]
XY CAUSE XY CAUSE
01* Maximum travel time. 17* Failures in configuration parameters (parametrization)
02* Lift out of travel or previous series open (previous to 18 Error in frequency inverter (in 3VF only)
door).
03* Lift parked after enabling final limit switch (hydraulic 19

lifts only).
04* Stuck contactor. 26* Lift at level and CPS off (hydraulic lift only)
05 Repeated errors in car door series. 27* No CPS switching at floor level (hydraulic lift only)
06 Door series open, during a service. 60 Functionality calls filtering EN81-28- inhibited
07 Landing locks series open during a service 61 Functionality OMROM variator- inhibited
08 Miscorrection for pulse reading 62 Functionality STOP- inhibited
09* Control unit fuse (FM) or power supply fuse (FF) 63 Functionality permanent service out light - inhibited
blown.
10* Failure in the MicroBASIC board. 64 Functionality permanent service out latch- inhibited
11 Door series open. Max. time exceeded. 65 Functionality 3C short floor- inhibited
12 Open door pushbutton, photocell and door sensitivity. 66 Functionality automatic door and electric cam-
Max. time exceeded. inhibited
13 Lift at intermediate floor with a terminal stopping 67 Functionality attendand mode- inhibited
switch open
14* Both terminal stopping switches open 68 Functionality U36 norm- inhibited
15* Upper terminal stopping switch goes from closed to 69 Functionality australia firefighter- inhibited
open in descent
16* Lower terminal stopping switch goes from closed to

open in ascent
* Errors considered to be serious: the control unit prevents lift from moving, thus becoming out of service. Control unit
generates the corresponding error (Fxy), which will be shown in the MicroBASIC PCB displays and will be stored for
future viewing. The car display (and/or landing display, if any) will show indications of the 1st and 2nd level in a flickering
way (configurable by means of the parameters 26).
Switching the inspection switch cancels out-of-service state.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
3.6. Incidences
Following is a list of incidences and their possible causes.
SYMPTOMS CHECK
- No led turns on at PCB MicroBASIC when connecting the - Voltage in controller (terminals R,S,T)
general switch QIM - Phases monitoring relay led: on, “if it is off, vary
the phases sequence”
- Series at the 380Vp branch: closed (thermal).
- Voltage at the transformer secondary
- PCB MicroBASIC fuses
- Under inspection, it does not go up or down - Series: external doors, locks, car
- Terminal stop. switches: 0Vdc, 226/0 Vdc, 228
- See information on display “block 1"
- Lift working normally does not store calls - Series 2/+24, photocell, open doors button
- Possible error permanent out of service E24
- Landing fire-brigade keyswitch is not active
- See information on display “block 1"
- Connector P5
- Lift working normally: - Possible transient out of service E23

- does not memorize landing calls - Series 2/+24: photocell, open doors button
- memorizes car calls but deletes them afterwards - See information on display “block 1"
- Controller commands doors to close, but prior to closing - Adjustment of TG timer, (microswitches SW1)
completely, doors open again - Adjustment of sensitivity microswitch
- The time elapsing between the end of a service and the
beginning of the next one is too short
- The lift is moving but does not receive pulses - Magnetic switch
- Pulses input: terminal 203, +24V, view pulses at
IMP display point
- Lift goes only to extreme floors - If it does not level, magnetic switch without power
supply or CFE connected without removing jumper J1
- Magnetic switch
- Pulses input: terminal 203, +24V, view pulses at
IMP display point
- Returns when stopping at floor - Lights up the photoswitch (if any)

- Screen installation
- Display does not work properly - Display model

- Display power supply
- Signals A-B-C-D provided by PCB MicroBASIC
- FM always blows - The series work properly

- Earth contact of any point of the series
- Contactor coils
- FF always blows - Short circuits and power consumption 24Vdc

- Earth contacts, 24V
- The car stops from high speed, without passing through - Leveller contact: 207, 0Vdc
slow speed, in 2-speed electric or hydraulic lift - Jumper J2 placed. It must always be in place,
except for 1-speed electric lift

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
- In duplex, when a landing call is made, both lifts start - Interconnection between groups P4, terminals T1
and T2 of both PCB MicroBASIC
- Configuration parameters of both control units
- 0Vdc unification of both control units
- Unification of external common (terminal 110) of
both control units
- In universal working mode it registers multiple landing - Configuration parameters

and/or car calls - Jumper J3 placed. Place only in this universal case
- Does not perform emergency operation, hydraulic - Thermomagnetic switch with battery QIB on
- Conductors voltage drop
- All series closed
- Series earth contacts
- Emergency valve
- Jumper J1 must be placed or there must be an
emergency end contact between terminals 5 and
0Vdc
- Battery voltage > 9Vdc
- Proper operation of the magnetic switch, (terminals
207, 0Vdc)
- Voltage between 12F and 0Vdc
- In asymmetrical duplex, calls are wrongly served or the - Configuration parameters in both boards
lift position is not correct - number of levels
- upper and lower asymmetry
- Call connection
- Display sequence
- In hydraulic emergency operation, without car door and - Delay circuit connected to pin RME
with cam, the operation ends without completely
interlocking landing semiautomatic door
- Lift does not level - Magnetic switch
- Any problem - PCB MicroBASIC fuses

- PCB MicroBASIC power supply inputs
220Vac: terminals 2 and 1 of PCB MicroBASIC
- Control unit configuration

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
3.7. Control unit follow-up
MicroBASIC and AMB2 control boards provide information on the control unit operation. Basic information on this
functionality is provided below (see chapter 4 for further detail).
3.7.1. Display
• Display points
< IMP: Pulses input coming from magnetic switches.
< SP: Active when the doors series and the safety contacts previous to doors are closed.
< SC: Active when all series are closed.
• Display digits
D3 D2 D1
SC SP IMP
3.7.2. Other light indicators
• +5V: Active when the microcontroller area is supplied with a voltage of 5Vdc. If there is no voltage, check fuse FT.
• +24V: Active when a 24Vdc voltage is supplied to the relay enabling area and all installation elements working with
this voltage. If there is no voltage, check fuses FF1 and FF2.
• NO LEVEL: Green indicator. Active when the lift is not at level, leveller closed.
• EMERG: Red flashing indicator. Only active in hydraulic lifts on emergency operation. It will be enabled when the
following occurs:
< With no mains power supply, the battery has an adequate voltage (>10Vdc).
< When all contacts and safety series are closed.
< When the lift is not at level or CFE contact is closed.
• RM: Red flashing indicator. Active when the lift is moving. Shows RM run relay status.
• RMR: Active when the lift is under inspection operation.
• RB: Active when the lift is about to start or is in down service.
• RS: Active when the lift is about to start or is performing a service at fast speed.
D3 D2 NO LEVEL EMERG
D1
DL11 DL7
SC SP IMP +5V
+24V
DL9
DL10
RMT RM RMR RB RS RVR
DL8 DL5 DL1 DL3 DL4 DL6
When the PCB MicroBASIC operates with the AMB1 and AMB2 extensions, it provides the same information as the standard
MicroBASIC control unit, both in leds and in the three digits of the display.
You will find further information in the chapters on the MicroBASIC, AMB1 and AMB2 boards.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
CHAPTER 4. MICROBASIC CONTROL UNIT OPERATION
4.1. Compatibility. MicroBasic - MicroBasic Prima
The new MicroBasic Prima board could replace any MicroBasic board of any previous version with no modification on
existing wiring.
This is possible because some parameters have been included for this purpose.
See the following changes according to pannel type, its relation to software version and the parameter (and value)
that has to be modified to achieve this compatibility.
FUNCTIONS ACCORDING TO VERSION

MICRO MICRO
BASIC PRIMA BASIC
INSTALACION SOFTWARE SOFTWARE
STOP OVER- WELDED LEVELING
TYPE VERSION VERSION
TEMPERATURE CONTACTOR CRITERION
(P/V) (P/V) (P/V) (P/V)
Terminal J Terminal F Stopped aAnalisys No

131 / 132 /
(30 / B) (24/A no leveling
133
(33 / A) (30 / B) (29 / B) 24/C leveling
Whitout
enlargement Terminal J Terminal F Stopped aAnalisys YES
Electric. 1 and 134 (30 / B)
2 speed and (33 / A) (30 / B) (29 / B) (CURRENT)
oleodinamic
see parameter Terminal J Stopped and YES

135 / 137 /
selection table Movement Analisys
141 / 146
From 165 (33) (Actual) (CURRENT
forward
Terminal J Terminal J Stopped aAnalisys NO
995 (30 / B) (24/A no leveling
(33 / A) (30 / B) (29 / B) 24/C leveling
Whitout TerminalJ Terminal F Stopped and YES

enlargement E13 / E15 (30 / B) Movement Analisys
3VFMAC (33 / A) (30 / B) (actual) (CURRENT)
E19 / 136 / see parameter Terminal J Stopped and YES

139 / 142 / selection table Movement Analisys
148 (33) (actual) (CURRENT) (CURRENT)
50A / 50B / Terminal J Terminal F Stopped aAnalisys No

50C / 50D / (30 / B) (24/A no leveling
50E / 50F (33 / A) (30 / B) (29 / B) 24/C leveling
Whit Terminal J Terminal F Stopped aAnalisys YES

enlargement From 171 51C (30 / B)
AMB1 / AMB2 forward (33 / A) (30 / B) (29 / B) (CURRENT)
see parameter TerminalJ Stopped and YES

52A selection table Movement Analisys
(33) (CURRENT) (CURRENT) (CURRENT)
P/V is the parameter y its suitable value for compatibility between microBASIC Prima board and the one to be
replaced, regardless of the version.
As an example, if we replace a V134 board in a hydraulic lift with open doors releveling:
Parameter 24, is C value, because is old directive and has releveling.

Parameter 29, is B value, because is welded contactor with stopped lift.
Parameter 30, is B value, because is over temperature in F terminal with overload and STOP function is in J terminal .
Parameter 33, is A value, because STOP is in J terminal and has any other value unless in this terminal over
temperature has not been analysed.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2. MicroBASIC PRIMA board
4.2.1 Main components and general scheme

CONFIGURATION ELEMENTS
P5
PCB MicroBASIC
SERIGRAPHY OF COMPONENTS
Jumpers
POINTS SIGNALLING
J1 . Do no fix a jumper if CFE (emergency final contact) is used. ON THE DISPLAYS
J2 . Fix a jumper, except for 1-speed electric lifts.

D3 D2 D1
J3 . Only fix a jumper in case of universal control unit.
J4 . Fix a jumper except for hydraulic lifts with Kleeman power unit. SC SP IMP
PULSE SERIES :
• ON . PULSE (LIT)
Fuses
• OFF . NO PULSE (NOT LIT)
FOP . Operator fuse ( 3A ).
DOOR SERIES :
FM . Control unit fuse ( 2A ). • ON . CLOSED (LIT)
• OFF . OPEN (NOT LIT)
FT . Fuse power supply 5vdc ( 1A ), max ( 1A )
LOCK SERIES :
FL . Signals fuse ( 1A ), max ( 3A ) • ON . CLOSED (LIT)
FF1 . Fuse power supply 24 vdc ( 3A ), max ( 3A ) • OFF . OPEN (NOT LIT)
FF2 . Fuse 20 Vs ( 3A ), max ( 3A )
CC1 . CC2 . CC3 . CH1 . CH2
Connections terminals in car and shaft
P4 P1, P2, P3
Communication channel, series (RS - 485) for duplex connections with Wiring connection terminals in
extension AMB1 and AMB2 controller
Pins
Pin 103 . Aerial connection pin. Safety series reading.
Pin RME . Aerial connection pin. Times RME for hydraulic lifts with cam.
Pin 207 . Aerial connection pin with leveller 538. Indicator light between floors.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Relays:
• RB: descent.
Active when the car starts or is performing a service in descent, 24Vdc. With red indicator light.
• RCAB: car calls.

Deletes car calls during inspection (terminal 109), 24Vdc.
• RBEXT: outside calls.

Deletes outside calls if JUMPER J3 is fixed (UNIVERSAL configuration) and relay is connected during service of lift
(terminal 110), 24Vdc.
• RET: start-up (hydraulic lifts).

Forced draught (electric lifts), 24 Vdc. RUN signal in 3VFMAC.
• RPA: RZS control relay.

Directly governed by the microcontroller, enables activating RZS when the CPS safety contact (terminals 00, 103) is
closed, 24Vdc.
• RLB: descent indicator light, 24Vdc.
• RLDO: indicator light free (not active) and occupied (active), 24Vdc.
• RLS: ascent indicator light, 24Vdc.
• RM: run.
Active when the car is moving, 24Vdc. With red flashing indicator light.
• RMP: door series.

Relay with 110Vac which is activated when ‘semiautomatic’ landing doors are closed, if contacts of safety series have
been previously closed. With indicator light: on central digit of PCB MicroBASIC display.
• RMR: inspection.
Active during inspection, 24Vdc. With red indicator light.
• RMT: voltage applied to control unit.

There are 3 relays. Active during normal operation. Not active during emergency operation in hydraulic lifts, 24Vdc.
With green indicator light.
• ROPA: automatic door opening relay, commands doors to open.
• ROPC: automatic door closing relay, commands doors to close.
• RS: ascent.
Active when the car starts or is performing a service in ascent, 24 Vdc. With red indicator light.
• RVR: high speed.

Active during high-speed run of car. With red indicator light.
• RZS: safety area.

Active when contact CPS ‘terminals 00, 103’ is closed and microcontroller commands bridging of doors, locks and car
doors series. This occurs when the car is in the unlocking area (and the safety contact or circuit connected to terminals
00 and 103 is closed). If, in this case, the car is running at slow speed, control unit starts advanced door opening;
(approach with doors open). This also happens during re-levelling with open doors, 110Vac.

19"U5" 2"R27" 17"U5" 4"R27" 15"U5" 6"R27" 13"U5" 8"R27" 19"U6" 2"R28" 17"U6" 4"R28" 15"U6" 6"R28" 13"U6" 8"R28" 19"U7" 2"R29" 17"U7" 4"R29" +24
0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc
8 5 5
+24
D42 D44 D46 D41 D53 D51 D49 D54 D61 D59 RMR RCAB RBEXT
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 1 2 2
VREG Bridge for 24vcc
D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D37 D36
0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc SIR 5"R29"
P5 1 +24
V3.02, NOV.05
208 J3 Only fix a jumper
101
SPC1 SPC2 SPC3 SPC4 SPC5 SPC6 SPC7 SPC8 SPC9 SPC10 RCAB in universal
SPRS
Second car control unit
3
HRL1 HRL2 HRL3 HRL4 HRL5 HRL6 HRL7 HRL8 HRL9 HRL10 call 11n
12"U15" 7"R29"
SPRB
First car
109 call 111
Inspección
PAP 2
0Vcc SEN CEL
+24
101
PCB MicroBASIC general scheme:
CAR CALLS AND REGISTERS

1
+24 10 9
20"U5" 1"R27" 18"U5" 3"R27" 16"U5" 5"R27" 14"U5" 7"R27" 20"U6" 1"R28" 18"U6" 3"R28" 16"U6" 5"R28" 14"U6" 7"R28" 20"U7" 1"R29" 18"U7" 3"R29" RBEXT
3 1 1 1 5
J 0Vcc RLDO RLB RLS RPA
D40 D43 D45 D47 D55 D52 D50 D48 D63 D60 8 8 8 2
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
D66 d
D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D39 D38
0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc 0Vcc
b 8"R55" 8"R29" 12"U15" 13"U15" 11"U15" 15"U15"
SPE1 SPE2 SPE3 SPE4 SPE5 SPE6 SPE7 SPE8 SPE9 SPE10 Signalling
FL
HRL1 HRL2 HRL3 HRL4 HRL5 HRL6 HRL7 HRL8 HRL9 HRL10 21
a 3 6 3 6 6
3 6
110 14"U15" RLDO
RLS RLB 4 2 RMP
3 6
4 5 4 5 7
5 7
0Vcc
16
2 4 7 5
Pin 207 for 8 217 218 215 294 214
Magnetic OUTSIDE CALLS AND REGISTERS (CH1) PIN
leveller 537 RET RET RET
switches
220Vp 1
Page 74
1S electric lifts indicator 1 2
+24 No fix a jumper LS LB LO LD LPA
Mac 324/24v 1 1 1 1 8 J1
light
if cfe is used between floors FP 0Vcc
2S, 3S electric lifts RMT1 RMT2 RMT3 3 ROPA ROPC 0Vp
(emergency final e c
Mac 325/24v 8 8 8 8 1
RMP D92 contact)
Hydraulic lifts 4
18
Mac 327, 328/12v IMP NIV 213
- + Fix a jumper 2 2 3 6
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
0Vcc ROPA
except for RME1 RME2 4 7
12"U13" 6"R29" 11"U13" 10"U13" 5 5 PIN RME Power supplies
kleeman unit 5 2
0Vcc D5 D88 5Vcc and 24Vcc
207 3 6 +5Vdc
13"U13" ROPC FT
203 5 RM 6 J4 R9
+12f +24 D87 45
8 0Vcc CFE 5
Hydraulic lift R53 RM 2
D15 221 223 222 V8 U30
+24 17"U15" 1 16"U15" DL7 DL9
DL11 D89 D90 RMT2
Electric lift 13"U22"
NO 3
LEVEL EMERG. FCAP FCCP
+12F 1 1
R61 RS
AFI RB +24Vcc
D11 D12 D14 D13 228
226 8 8 106 PR2 FF1

0Vs 14
+ 22
0Vcc 5 7 +24
5
V2
RB 7 DL10
RS SAFS -
10
6 RMR 6
M3
20Vs
19 0Vcc
6
8 Single-phase
RVR Fix a jumper 0Vcc
operator
1 J2 except for 1S
electric lifts
18"U15" 0Vcc
MTIPIEPMB302GB
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2.2 Information provided by the controller
PCB MicroBASIC supplies all the information provided by the controller concerning installation, condition of
components, etc..., in three ways:
• Indicator lights (led).

• 3-digit display (D1,D2 and D3 in the figure), controlled by pushbutton PL1.
• Output for display: every time the car or landing position indicator alternatively displays the two lower floors, there
is information about a serious error in the installation causing the lift to stop completely.
The following figure shows the different indicator lights in the controller:
PCB MicroBASIC
D3 D2 D1
NO LEVEL EMERG
SC SP IMP
PL1
DL11 DL7
+5V
DL9
DL10
+24V
DL8 RM DL1 RB RS RVR
RMT DL5 RMR DL3 DL4 DL6
4.2.2.1. Indicator lights (leds)
• IMP : entry of pulses from pulse generator.

At appearance of voltage 24Vdc on terminal 203, indicator light is switched on. In case of correct operation, it will be
energized twice, while the car is moving from one floor to the next (including extreme floors).
• SP : active when door series and the previous safety contacts are closed. That is, terminal 104 is energised with a
voltage of 110 Vac.
• SC : active when all series are closed. That is, terminal 106 is energised with a voltage of 110Vac.
• +5V, : red indicator light, active when a voltage of 5Vdc is applied to the microcontroller area. If there is no
voltage, check fuse FT.
• +24V. : red indicator light, active when a voltage of 24Vdc is applied to the relay actuation area and all elements of
the installation working with this voltage. In case of no voltage, check fuses FF1 and FF2.
• NO LEVEL : green indicator light.

Active while the lift is not at floor level, leveller closed: terminal 207 connected to 0Vdc.
• EMERG : red flashing indicator light.

Only active in hydraulic lifts during emergency operation and if the following points are accurate:
< battery voltage is adequate (> 10Vdc) at disconnection of mains supply.
< all safety contacts and series are closed.
< the lift is not at floor level (jumper J1 fixed) or contact CFE, connected between terminals 5 and 0Vdc, is closed
(jumper J1 not fixed).
• RMT : green indicator light.

Active during normal operation of control unit. If fuses FF1 and FF2 blow, the indicator light switches off. Informs about
the condition of relays RMT1, RMT2 and RMT3.
• RM : red flashing indicator light.
Active while the lift is moving. Informs of the condition of run relay RM.
• RMR : red indicator light, lift in inspection operation.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Active with voltage 24Vdc on terminal 208. Informs of the condition of relay RMR.
• RB : red indicator light, active when the lift starts or is performing a service in descent.
Informs of the state of relay RB.
• RS : red indicator light, active when the lift starts or is performing a service in ascent.
Informs of the condition of relay RS.
• RVR : red indicator light, active when the lift starts or is performing a service at high speed. Informs of the
condition of relay RVR.
4.2.2.2. 3-digit display
The 3-digit display indicates full information about a multiplicity of data concerning the lift.
Name of digits :
A B C
DISPLAY on
PCB MicroBASIC
4.2.2.2.1. First information provided
When control unit is commissioned for the first time, the number of the software version is displayed for 3 seconds.
Please indicate the number of the respective software version when contacting MACPUARSA about any technical aspect
concerning the control unit.
4.1.2.2.2. Program mode information
In PROGRAM mode (see chapter 4.2.3), digits on left-hand side and in centre indicate the number of the recently
selected parameter, the digit on the right-hand side represents the memorised value of this parameter. That is, the
new value only appears as digit on display, once it has been defined and once PL1 button is pressed, as by pressing
the button the new value is memorised.
Selected parameter. Present value of the selected parameter.

Possible values : Possible values :
( 00 ) ( 01 ) ... ( 31 ) (A)(B)(C)(D)

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2.2.2.3. Information in normal operation
Different blocks of information are shown on the display. In order to proceed from one block to the next, press PL1
button for a short time. Once the last block is on the display, renewed pressing of button leads to return to the first
block of information.
• Block 1 :
< car position.
< reasons preventing movement of car.
< floor and type of call served by car.
• Block 2 : memorised car calls.
• Block 3 : memorised outside descent calls.
• Block 4 : memorised outside ascent calls.
• Block 5 : condition of lift components.
• Block 6 : stored faults and errors.
Block 1: Car position and movement
< Alternating information about the position of the car:
0 X
Position of car
(0) indicates viewing

of position of car
< Viewing of information while the lift is not moving: number of the component which mainly prevents movement of
lift, and position of lift, is displayed alternately (see section 3.3 of this manual).
0 X
No. of the installation component
the condition of which prevents
movement of lift.
(A) indicates the component

which mainly prevents
movement of lift

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
< Display of information during movement of lift: alternating information about type of call and floor served by the
lift, and about actual position of the car.
Serves car call on floor 7
Serves outside descent call on floor 8
Serves outside ascent call on floor 4
Block 2: Memorised car calls
Informs cyclically about all memorised car calls. The following figure shows the way in which the car calls to floors 2, 5
and 9 appear on display:
1 SEC. 1 SEC.
Block 3: Memorised outside descent calls
Informs cyclically about all memorised outside descent calls. The following figure shows the way in which memorised
outside descent calls to floors 3, 7, 8 and 10 appear on display:
1 SEC. 1 SEC. 1 SEC.
Block 4: Memorised outside ascent calls
Informs cyclically about all memorised outside ascent calls. The following figure shows the way in which memorised
outside ascent calls to floors 1 and 6 appear on display:
1 SEC.
1 SEC.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Block 5: Condition of lift components
This block contains information about the conditions of the different components of the installation. Each component is
provided with a number. If this number is flashing, the respective circuit is open, not active; if the number is not
flashing, the circuit of the component is closed or connected. Once this block is entered, indication is as follows:
No information is displayed
in these digits.
If you wish to enter this block, wait 2 seconds until appearance of the following:
That is, information is being provided concerning the condition of component no.1. By pressing ‘ PL1 ‘ button the other
components may be viewed consecutively, until the last one is reached. At renewed pressing of button the (E) appears
without information. If button is not pressed again afterwards, we remain in block 5; if button is pressed once again,
we enter block 6:
PRESS
DO NOT PRESS PRESS

PRESS
PROCEED TO
NEXT BLOCK
Leave ‘ PL1 ‘ button pressed for several seconds, in order to arrive at point ( • ) more quickly.
IMPORTANT NOTE: If digits are blinking, condition or component is contrary to the value indicated in section 3.4 of this
manual.
No. of the lift component:

Not flashing : circuit closed or connected.
Flashing : circuit open or disconnected.
(E) indicates viewing of
the lift components
condition

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Block 6: Stored faults and errors
In this block, the last 16 faults and errors which have occurred in the installation may be viewed.
When a new error occurs, it appears on display, irrespective of the block which is actually being viewed, and is stored
on PCB MicroBASIC. In the process, the oldest memorised error is deleted (if already 16 errors were memorised).
At entry into this block of information, the error which has occurred last appears first. This means that the errors
indicated start with the youngest and finish with the oldest. Each error is provided with a number informing about its
age. Accordingly, error no. 3 must have occurred after no. 5.
Technique of representation of errors:
PREVIOUS
NEXT
BLOCK
BLOCK
PRESS PRESS
DO NOT PRESS 1 SEC.
1 SEC.
1 SEC.
ERROR FLOOR ON WHICH

AGE OF CODE ERROR OCCURRED
ERROR
01: LOWEST FLOOR
• The following information is displayed cyclically, with an interval of 1 second:
< Age of error and error code.

< Floor on which it occurred.
• If PL1 button is pressed for less than 1 second, the next error (older than the previous one) appears, and so forth.
• If PL1 button is pressed permanently at display of any error, the following appears:
NEXT
BLOCK
PRESS
DO NOT PRESS
ERRORS
DISPLAY
• By releasing of button and renewed pressing the following block is entered.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2.2.2.4. Information during inspection
The 6 blocks of information described in the previous point also appear here. Only information offered by block 1
changes:
• With the lift stopped.
1 SEC.
Indicates that
inspection control
unit is operating
• If the up button is pressed.
1 SEC.
Car ascends during inspection
• If the down button is pressed.
1 SEC.
Car descends during inspection
If car is not moving, movement is prevented by a component; that is, “AAA” does not appear, but instead a code is
displayed indicating the component which prevents movement. For further details, see section 3.3.
4.2.2.2.5. Information in special situations
• Return process, “correction”: while the lift is being returned, “effects correction at final floor”, information
concerning position of the car appears on display (flashing).
• Error in installation: irrespective of the information actually on display, any error occurring in the installation is
displayed, until ‘PL1’ button is pressed. The error remains memorised in non-volatile storage, for later display.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2.3. Configuration and adjustment of parameters
One of the most important features of the control unit is the possibility to modify a number of up to 30 parameters
with which certain functions may be adjusted (type of landing doors, main floor level, deceleration for relevelling,
etc...).
In normal conditions, the installer needs not to modify any parameter, since they are factory adjusted for each
installation.
If necessary parameters may be modified according to the following method.
4.2.3.1. Parametrization method
4.2.3.1.1. Elements for configuration
Microswitches SW1 and PL1 button are used for adjusting the parameters in the control unit. They are situated in the
upper left-hand area of the MicroBASIC printed circuit board. The 3-digit display (D1, D2, D3) is located next to them,
enabling to view the value of the selected parameter.
D3 D2 D1 PL1
SC SP IMP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
SW1
4.2.3.1.2. Types of parameters
Determine which parameters are to be modified, before performing any operation.

Two different groups:
• Group 1: Timers TG, TE and MTR.
• Group 2: Parameters [0] to [25].
Depending on which group it belongs to, parametrization may vary.
4.2.3.1.3. Parametrization
• Group 1 parameters
Firstly, disconnect the controller with thermomagnetic switch QIG.
Select RUN MODE if only one of the timers (TG, TE or MTR) is meant to be changed. For this purpose microswitch no. 1
of bank of microswitches SW1 is brought in OFF position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
RUN MODE
SW1
MicroSWITCH (1) in OFF position
Normal operating mode of lift
By means of the 7 remaining microswitches the exact time for each timer may now be defined (see tables):
< TG: General timer (microswitches 2 - 3 - 4), defining the following:

! maximum door closing time (lock error detection).
! time passing between the end of run and initiation of the next (collective / selective operation).
In universal operating mode, it corresponds to car timer.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Table: Parameters TG selection:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1

ON ON 5 Seg. ON 6 Seg. ON 7 Seg.
OFF 2 Seg. OFF OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1

ON ON ON ON
OFF 8 Seg. OFF 10 Seg. OFF 12 Seg. OFF 15 Seg.
• TE: Outside call timer (microswitches 5 - 6).
Once the general timer is finished, this timer records the time, from which the lift serves an outside call without
previously choosing direction. In universal operating mode, this timer coincides with the classical outside call timer.
Table: Parameters TE selection:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1
ON ON 4 Seg.
OFF
2 Seg. OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1
ON ON
OFF
6 Seg. OFF
10 Seg.
• MTR: Maximum running time (microswitches 7 - 8).
Defines the maximum running time of the lift between two consecutive pulse signals. If this value is exceeded, there is
an error concerning maximum running time. This points to an abnormal operating situation (for example rope slip on
traction pulleys).
Table: Parameters MTR selection:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1
ON ON 12 Seg.
OFF
8 Seg. OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1
ON ON
OFF
16 Seg. OFF
20 Seg.
Parameter No. 23 in PROGRAM mode enables duplicating these times for special situations.
Re-connect the controller with thermomagnetic switch QIG after fixing the positions of microswitches as indicated in
the previous tables, and the lift will operate normally with the new values of timers.
• Group 2 parameters
In MBAS PRIMAhave been inserted 32 new parameters, wich are incorporated to 32 former parameters existing , So,
ther are two bank of parameters: the first one from [0] to [31] and the second from [32] to [63].
First, disconnect the controller with thermomagnetic QIG.
PROGRAM mode is used for changing parameters [0] to [31]. For this purpose, microswitch no. 1 is brought in ON
position and the control panel is re-connected. For changing parameters [32 ] to [63], in program mode, microswitch
no.1 is brought in OFF position from 1 position. So, 0 parameter position corresponding with 32, 1 with 33, etc.
Subsequently, PCB MicroBASIC starts showing information on the three-digit display.
Using the following diagram, select the desired parameter and value from the microswitches bank SW1, shown in the
table Parameters Configuration.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
< Bank of microswitches (SW1).
! Microswitch No. 1, always in ON position, program mode. En OFF for second bank, when it is in program
mode.
! Microswitches No. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, defines binary number of parameter.
! Microswitches No. 7, 8, defines the new value of the selected parameter.
Once selected, it is memorised on PCB MicroBASIC by pressing of button PL1.

On the display, digits on left-hand side and in centre indicate the number of the recently selected parameter, the digit
ON ON
SW1
OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To second 1 2
parameters bank
In (ON) position
PROGRAM MODE
Defines binary Defines new value of
No. of parameter: selected parameter
ON ON
PARAMETER (0) OFF VALUE (A) OFF
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON
PARAMETER (1) VALUE (B)
OFF OFF
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON
PARAMETER (2) VALUE (C) OFF
OFF
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON
PARAMETER (2) VALUE (D)
OFF OFF
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
PARAMETER (31)
OFF
2 3 4 5 6
on the right-hand side represents the memorised value of this parameter. That is, the new value only appears as digit
on display, once it has been defined and once PL1 button is pressed, as by pressing the button the new value is
memorised.
Repeat this operation as many times as the number of parameters to be altered.
Once the desired parameters are modified, the controller is once again disconnected, RUN MODE is entered and values
of timers are defined (see previous point). Then, control panel is activated. That is, after modifying any parameter of
group 2 (PROGRAM MODE) disconnect control panel, enter RUN MODE and adjust group 1 parameters (timers).
Then, controller is re-activated.
NOTE: In RUN MODE group 1 parameters are adjusted and in PROGRAM MODE parameters of group 2, the latter being
the normal operating mode of lift.
Selected parameters. Present value of the

Possible values: selected parameter.
(00), (01), ... (31) Possible values :
(A)(B)(C)(D)

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2.3.2. Parameters configuration
PARAMETERS VALUE
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF
NUMBER
DISPLAYED MICROSWITCHES FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF 5 - 9 - 13 2 - 6 - 10 - 14 3 - 7 - 11 - 15 4 - 8 - 12 - 16
NUMBER OF FLOORS
1 2 3 4 5 6 OF THE INSTALLATION
ON
OFF
2-3-4 5-6-7-8 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 13 - 14 - 15 - 16
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
FIREMAN’S KEY SWITCH FLOOR 1º 2º 3º 4º
1 2 3 4 5 6
TYPE OF LANDING DOORS MANUAL
ON
SEMI- AUTOMATIC
OFF
AUTOMATIC
1 2 3 4 5 6 SELECTIVE
ON UNIVERSAL SELECTIVE MIXED ASCENT
OPERATING MODE
OFF SELECTIVE AND DESCENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 SIMPLEX
MIXED SELEC. DUPLEX DUPLEX
ON TYPE OF INSTALLATION SIMPLEX
OFF 2 CALLS LIFT 1 LIFT 2
DESCENT
1 2 3 4 5 6
NUMBER OF FLOORS
ON
OFF
ASCENT IN 2 3 4 5
MIXED SELECTIVE
1 2 3 4 5 6 No. OF FLOORS IN LOWER

ON AREA FOR ASYMMETRIC LIFT 0 1 2 3
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
No. OF FLOORS IN UPPER
ON
OFF
AREA FOR ASYMMETRIC LIFT 0 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
SPEED SPEED
ON REGULATION REGULATION
TYPE OF LIFT ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC
OFF
CHANGE 1C CHANGE 2C
1 2 3 4 5 6 Hydraulic 0.2 SEC. 2 SEC

1 SEC 3 SEC
ON AUXILIARY Phase 8 DIRECT
OFF TIMER (SEC) Elec. Forced
Draught 5 10 18 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 - OVERTEMP.
- OVERTEMP. - OVERTEMP. - OVERTEMP.
AUXILIARY INPUT - RPA
ON - AREA RPA - RPA - AREA (RPA)
FUNCTIONS - RELEVELLING
OFF
- PCP - ELECTRIC - GONG
START
GENERATOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
TYPE OF HYDRAULIC SOFT STOP
ON
POWER UNIT STANDARD (SPECIAL
OFF
VERSION)
1 2 3 4 5 6
- COMING - DIRECTION - OCCUPIED
ON AUXILIARY OUTPUT - COMING + STANDSTILL ARROWS - CAM
OFF FUNCTIONS - CAM - CAM - CAM
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF 1 - 5 - 9 - 13 2 - 6 - 10 - 14 3 - 7 - 11 - 15 4 - 8 - 12 - 16
MAIN FLOOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF 1-2-3-4 5-6-7-8 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 13 - 14 - 15 - 16

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
PARAMETERS VALUE
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF
NUMBER
DISPLAYED MICROSWITCHES FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
RETURN TIME TO MAIN FLOOR
NO RETURN 1 MINUTE 14 MINUTES
OFF IMMEDIATE
FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6
FLOORS WITH RETURN
ON TO MAIN FLOOR 2 LOWEST 3 LOWEST
OFF ALL FLOORS LOWEST
FLOORS FLOORS
FLOOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
DECELERATION FOR 0.5 1 2 5
RELEVELLING
1 2 3 4 5 6
DOES NOT
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
ON DELETION OF CAR CALLS NO DELETE, IF SERIES
OFF OR PHOTOCELL No. OF CAR No. OF CAR
DELETION ARE SWITCHED CALLS: 6
CALLS: 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON OPTIONS FOR DIRECTION
TYPE A
OFF INDICATOR TYPE B TYPE C
STANDARD
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF RETURN FLOOR LOWEST UPPER
FLOOR FLOOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON APPROACH WITH
OFF OPEN DOORS NOT ACTIVE ACTIVE
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
DOUBLING MTR and TG NO MTR TG MTR and TG
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON TERM. K
ON ON (COMPATIB.
OFF
DECISION CRITERION FOR NO
RELEVELLING DIRECTION TERMINAL K ANCIENT
RELEVELLING
DIRECTIVE)
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON NO NEAR NEAR FLOOR
OFF OMRON INVERTER FLOOR PLANTA
ACTUAL
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON REPRESENTATION PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT
OFF
LOWER FLOORS
IN PERMANENT FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR
ALTERNATELY.
OUT-OF-SERVICE DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON FIRE FIGHTERS STANDAR U 36 AUSTRAL. FIRE AUSTARL. FIRE
OFF 119 CC1+OPEN 119 CC1+ OPEN
DOOR CONTACT DOOR TIMER
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON PARAMETERS
OFF DISPLAY
(PRESS PL1)
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON STICKED CONTACTER ANALYSIS STOPPED + STOPPED
OFF MOVEMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 TERMINAL F
ENGINE TEMP.
ON ENGINE TEMPERATURE ON TERMINAL K TOGETHER WITH
OFF STOP FUNCTION STOP OVERLOAD
PARAMETER 33 STOP TERM. J
1 2 3 4 5 6
RECEPTION
ON UTILITIES AUTO CHECK SENDING
VIA SERIES
OFF VIA SERIES
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
PARAMETERS VALUE
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
ON ON ON ON
NUMBER OFF OFF OFF OFF
MICROSWITCHES FUNCTION
FUNCIÓN
DISPLAYED
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON CALLS FILTERING YES
NO
OFF (terminal G)
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON STOP terminal K
OFF NO Terminal CC1- terminal CH1-
120 120
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON terminal G
OFF
PERMANENT SERVICE NO Terminal CC1- terminal CH1-
OUT LIGHT 120 120
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON PERMANENT SERVICE
NO Terminal CC1- Terminal CH1- Terminal CC1-
OFF OUT CAM
119 119 118
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON NO terminal CC1- terminal CC1- Terminal CH1-
OFF
SHORT FLOOR 3C
120 119 120
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON AUTOMATIC DOOR NO terminal CC1- terminal CC1- terminal CC1-
OFF AND ELECTRIC CAM
120 119 118
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON NO YES
OFF ATTENDANT MODE
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON OUT OF ORDER Open Closed
OFF DOOR PARK
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON Car
OFF SIMULATION MODE NO Calls Both
Motion
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON OUT ACTIVATION NO APPLICATION Next Floor Next Floor Next Floor
OFF
2ND SPEED BENCH Out G Out CC1-120 Out CH1-120
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
PARAMETERS VALUE
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
ON ON ON ON
DISPLAYED OFF OFF OFF OFF
NUMBER
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON FLOOR CHANGE TYPE 1C 2C 1P 3C
OFF
1,2
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF
2,3
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 3,4
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON FLOOR CHANGE TYPE
1C 2C 1P 3C
OFF 4,5
1 2 3 4 5 6
5,6
1C 2C 1P 3C
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
FLOOR CHANGE TYPE
6,7
1C 2C 1P 3C
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 7,8
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
FLOOR CHANGE TYPE 1C 2C 1P 3C
OFF
8,9
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF
1C 2C 1P 3C
9,10
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 10,11
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 11,12
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
12,13
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 13,14
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF FLOOR CHANGE TYPE 1C 2C 1P 3C
14,15
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 15,16

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2.3.3. Description of parameters
• Parameters [ 0 ] [ 1 ] : Number of floors of the installation.
Functional adjustment of parameter [ 0 ] and parameter [ 1 ] to the number of floors.
Table: Adjustment of parameters [ 0 ] [ 1 ]
FLOORS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PARAMETER [0] B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
PARAMETER [1] A A A B B B B C C C C D D D D
• Parameter [ 2 ] : Floor on which fireman’s key switch is located.
< Value A : key switch on 1st floor.

< Value B : key switch on 2nd floor.
< Value C : key switch on 3rd floor.
< Value D : key switch on 4th floor.
• Parameter [ 3 ] : Type of landing doors.
< Value A : semiautomatic landing doors (both with or without car doors).
< Value B : automatic landing doors.
• Parameter [ 4 ] : Operating mode.
< Value A : Universal.

Only 1 or 2 landing calls are accepted (simplex or duplex, respectively). Function according to the number of floors:
! Up to 10 floors : connection of calls identical to selective control unit in descent. Possibility of memorising 1
car call. Landing signalling ‘coming’ is equivalent to register of landing calls.
! From 11 to 16 floors : special connection of calls. See diagrams. Only 1 car call is accepted. Landing signalling
‘coming’ may be procured by adding a MS-MPX printed circuit board controlled by terminals 117, 118, 119
and 120 of group CH1.
Maximum number of calls:

! Simplex: 10
! Duplex: 10
< Value B : Selective control unit in descent.

Maximum number of stops:
! Simplex: 10
! Duplex: 10
Note: It is possible to increase the number of floors with extension boards AMB1, AMB2 and AMB3.
< Value C : Mixed selective control unit.
This value is valid for simplex lifts. In operating mode mixed ‘selective control unit’, several lower floors may be
defined as ‘selective control unit in ascent’, defining the others as ‘selective control unit in descent’. Parameter No. 6
defines how many lower floors belong to ‘selective control unit in ascent’. It may be that the highest floor of those
defined as ‘selective control unit in ascent’ receives a call in ascent and descent mode, the lower ones with up call
pushbutton, and the higher ones with down call pushbutton (see value B of parameter No. 5).
Maximum number of floors (1 pushbutton on «main floor») 10; (2 pushbuttons on «main floor») 9.
< Value D : Selective control unit in ascent and descent.

Maximum number of stops :
! Simplex: 6
! Duplex: 6
Note: It is possible to increase the number of floors with extension circuits AMB1 and AMB2.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Parameter [ 5 ] : Type of installation.
< Value A : simplex.
Always fix this value in lifts with simplex universal control unit, selective control unit in descent, selective in ascent and
descent or mixed selective control unit with only 1 call pushbutton on the main floor; in this case, this floor must be
the highest with landing call in ascent.
See value C of parameter 4.
< Value B : simplex, mixed selective control unit, 2 call buttons on main floor.
This value may only be selected if the value of parameter 4 is C (simplex lift, mixed selective control unit). With this
parameter some lower floors may be defined as ‘selective control unit in ascent’, defining the others as ‘selective
control unit in descent’.
Value B is selected if the highest floor of ‘selective control unit in ascent’, the typical «MAIN FLOOR», is to be
provided with a double button: ascent and descent. Thus, calls below this level will be ‘selective in ascent’ and calls
above this level will be ‘selective in descent’. In this situation, the maximum number of floors is 9.
< Value C or D : Lift 1 or lift 2 in duplex.
If control unit is duplex, one PCB MicroBASIC must be configured with value C, and the other one with value D.
Assignation is indifferent.
• Parameter [ 6 ] : Number of floors ‘ascent’ in ‘mixed selective control unit’.
< Value A : 2 floors.

< Value B : 3 floors.
< Value C : 4 floors.
< Value D : 5 floors.
Defines the number of lower floors with ascent pushbutton in the configuration ‘mixed selective control unit’ (see value
C of parameter 4). Floors above the defined floors are provided with descent buttons. If the value of parameter 5 is B
‘mixed selective control unit, 2 pushbuttons on main floor’, the highest floor of those defined in parameter 6, there
must be 2 call pushbuttons, both ascent and descent. Floors above this floor are defined as ‘descent’.
See examples:
PARAMETER LANDING CALLS CONNECTION (CH1)
4 5 6 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
C A B
MIXED SIMPLEX 3 FLOORS FLOOR FLOORFLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C B C
SIMPLEX, 2 4 FLOORS FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOORFLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR
MIXED
ON M. FLOOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C B A
SIMPLEX, 2 FLOOR FLOORFLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR
MIXED 2 FLOORS
ON M. FLOOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
• Parameter [ 7 ] [ 8 ] : Number of floors in lower and upper area, respectively, for asymmetric lift.
< Value A: 0
< Value B: 1
< Value C: 2
< Value D: 3
This function is only valid for Duplex installations. It enables definition of how many floors one of the lifts does not
serve in the lower area (parameter 7) or in the upper area (parameter 8), with respect to the other lift. Value A is
selected for the lift which arrives at all floors. The lift which does not serve some of the floors receives value B, C, or D.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Both PCB MicroBASIC must have the same value for parameters 0 and 1 (number of floors of the installation),
corresponding to the number of floors of the lift which serves them all.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
In any asymmetric lift, the terminals for connection of car calls corresponding with the floors not served must be free.
That is, if a lift is asymmetric on 2 floors in the lower area, terminals 111 and 112 of plug CC1 remain free.
• Parameter [ 9 ] : Type of lift.
< Value A : electric lift, 1 or 2 speeds.

NOTE: Jumper J2 must always be fixed in value A, B, C and D, except in 1-speed electric lift.
< Value B : hydraulic lift.
< Value C : speed regulation electric lift with 3VFMAC1, change 1C (see point 5.4.3).
< Value D : speed regulation electric lift with 3VFMAC1, change 2C (see point 5.4.3).
• Parameter [ 10 ] : Auxiliary Timer.
For electric lift, timer for forced draught:
< Value A : 5 sec.

< Value B : 10 sec.
< Value C : 18 sec.
< Value D : 25 sec.
For hydraulic lift, star phase timer:
< Value A : 0,2 sec. Select this value in case of direct starting.
< Value B : 1 sec.
< Value C : 2 sec.
< Value D : 3 sec.
• Parameter [ 11 ] : Auxiliary inputs functions.
Facilitates definition of specific functions of auxiliary entries, terminals ‘j’ and ‘k’ of group P2, and terminal 20 of group
P3.
‘Complete’ signal is obtained through terminal g for all possible values of parameter 11, unless parameter 13 is given
value C, in which case this terminal is used to connect a cam activating relay.
In OMRON frequency variation, this output is used to energize relay R2AC, which indicates service between consecutive
floors with parameter [25] in B.
< Value A :
! Terminal j (P2). Overtemperature. If voltage on this terminal (+24) disappears, the control unit stops the lift
after the end of run and remains in this condition, until once again energised, causing a return to normal
service. During the described period no car calls or landing calls are served.
! Terminal k (P2): Unlocking area for relevelling. Once control unit decides to start relevelling (hydraulic lift), it
analyses the voltage value on this terminal. If there is no voltage, it understands that the lift is below floor
level and initiates relevelling upwards. If there is a voltage of 24Vdc, control unit knows that the lift is above
floor level and starts relevelling downwards. See parameter no. 24.
! Terminal 20 (P3): Door closing pushbutton. As soon as voltage 24Vdc is applied to this terminal, the door
opening timer is switched off, and closing of door is initiated immediately (only if there are car calls). Make
sure that voltage appears on this terminal (door closing pushbutton connected), when door is fully opened.
Doors with three-phase operator must be provided with a contact (normally closed) of the door opening relay.
< Value B :
! Terminal j (P2). Overtemperature. See value A, terminal j (P2).
! Terminal k (P2): Unlocking area for relevelling. See value A, terminal k (P2).
! Terminal 20 (P3): Electric generator operation. As soon as voltage 24Vdc is applied to this terminal, control
unit knows that it is being supplied by an emergency unit and not by the mains. Only in duplex installation
without AMB2.
< Value C :

! Terminal k (P2). Unlocking area for relevelling. See value A, terminal k (P2).
! Terminal 20 (P3). Command to initiate relevelling. PCB MicroBASIC initiates relevelling once the following
factors occur simultaneously:
A. Car is between floors.
B. Terminal 20 is energised with 24Vdc.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
If parameter 11 is given any other value, relevelling is only initiated once A) (car is between floors) occurs.
< Value D:
! Terminal f (P2). Output for GONG relay. Actuates GONG at arrival on floor.
! Terminal k (P2). Unlocking area for relevelling. See value A, terminal k (P2).
• Parameter [ 12 ] : Type of power unit ( hydraulic lift ).
< Value A : standard.
< Value B : Kleeman.
Delays power failure of pump behind floor on which car is stationed (ascents) for 1 second. In this case, control panel
is provided with a special circuit for internal connection.
• Parameter [ 13 ] : Auxiliary outputs functions.
Facilitates definition of specific functions of auxiliary outlets, terminals h and i of group P2.
< Value A: coming, cam.

! Terminal h (P2) activates the relay for the neutral feeder of the signal voltage of ‘coming’. It is activated while
the lift is moving in slow speed, and remains activated after end of run, until general timer TG is finished.
! Terminal i (P2) activates a relay which in turn actuates the cam.
< Value B: coming + standstill, cam.
! Terminal h (P2) activates the relay for the neutral feeder of the signal voltage of coming and standstill. It is
activated while the lift moves in slow speed and remains activated after end of run, until timer TG is finished,
after end of operation coming. It is also activated while the lift is situated at floor level, without starting a run
standstill.
! Terminal i (P2) activates a relay which in turn actuates the cam.

< Value C: direction arrows, cam.
! Terminals h and i (P2) activate two relays for the neutral feeder of the direction arrows for descent and
ascent. Parameter [20] enables definition of different functional logics for direction arrows.
! Terminal g (P2). Terminal for ‘complete’ signalling, except if this value is activated temporarily and deleted
afterwards, during use of this terminal for connection of a relay which in turn actuates the cam.
In frequency variation OMRON, it is used to activate relay R2AC, which indicates service between consecutive floors
with parameter [25] in B.
< Value D:
! Terminal h (P2) for special signalling in shaft, basically for lifts with universal control unit: If semiautomatic
door is open (contact of doors open series) signal remains permanently lit.
Intermittent signal, with intervals of 1 sec., during movement of lift. In other situations, signals are not
active.
! Terminal i (P2) activates relay which actuates cam.
• Parameter [ 14 ] [ 15 ] : Main floor.
In hydraulic lifts, standards require that both parameters be given value A.

Functional adjustment of parameters 14 and 15 to floor defined as main floor:

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Table: Adjustment of parameters [ 0 ] [ 1 ]
FLOORS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PARAMETER [0] A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
PARAMETER [1] A A A A B B B B C C C C D D D D
• Parameter [ 16 ] : Return time to main floor.
< Value A : return function to main floor not initiated.
< Value B : return function initiated immediately after completing service of memorised calls.
< Value C : returns after 1 minute without operating.
< Value D : returns after 14 minutes without operating.
In hydraulic lifts, standards require not to put value A.

Control unit enables return of lift to floor defined as main floor (floor defined in parameter 14 and parameter 15) after
a certain period of time. It is possible to initiate this function only when lift is situated on certain floors (see parameter
17).
• Parameter [ 17 ] : Floors on which return to main floor is initiated.
< Value A : function of return to main floor is initiated, irrespective of the floor on which lift is situated.
< Value B : function of return to main floor is initiated only if lift is on the next floor in down direction.
< Value C : only in case of the two next floors in down direction.
< Value D : only in case of the three next floors in down direction.
The function of return to main floor may be limited to a fixed number of floors on which the lift is situated.
NOTE: In case of hydraulic lifts, the following parameter values become obligatory for compliance with standard EN 81-
2:
< parameter 14: VALUE A.

< parameter 16: VALUE D.
• Parameter [ 18 ] : Deceleration for relevelling.
Time during which lift must be situated between floors, for initiation of relevelling.
< Value A : 0.5 sec.

< Value B : 1 sec.
< Value C : 2 sec.
< Value D : 5 sec.
• Parameter [ 19 ] : Deletion of car calls.
Control unit is provided with different functions for deletion of car calls. Multiple car calls may occur, due to improper
handling of control station (example: 1 single passenger presses all car buttons).
< Value A : Without deletion. If this value is selected, control unit does not take any action in case of multiple car
calls.
< Value B : No deletion if door series or photocell are switched. If, by means of this system, control unit discovers
that in 2 consecutive runs of a lift, there has been no opening of door series (connection 103-104) or actuation of
photocell (connection 2-24 Vdc), all car calls are deleted, as nobody has entered or left the car during both runs.
< Value C : Maximum number of car calls: 3. Limits number of car calls which may be registered by control unit.
< Value D : Maximum number of car calls: 6. Limits number of car calls which may be registered by control unit.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Parameter [ 20 ] : Options for imminent departure indicator.
< Value A : direction arrows are activated while the lift is moving in one direction and calls not yet served are
memorised, during slow speed and until start for serving of next call (moment at which it is deactivated). If there
are no calls not yet served, both arrows remain luminous, until timer (TG) is finished.
< Value B :Equivalent to value A, with the exception that both arrows remain luminous indefinitely, if there is no
memorisation of calls not yet served.
< Value C : Equivalent to value B, with the exception that both arrows are deactivated, if there is no memorisation
of calls not yet served.
• Parameter [ 21 ] : Return floor.
Initiates return control unit for correction, at activation of lift or in case of miscorrection between floors.
Possible options:
< Value A : correction on the lowest floor.
< Value B : correction on the highest floor.
• Parameter [ 22 ] : Approach with doors open.
Activates pre-opening function of doors during approach to floor:
< Value A : not active.

< Value B : active.
Note: Board 538 should be installed to activate this function.
• Parameter [ 23 ] : Doubling time of timer MTR (maximum running time) and TG (general timer).
Option only applicable to installations with very long running times between two consecutive floors (more than 20
seconds).
< Value A : Normal option (values indicated in section RUN mode).

< Value B : Doubles times selected in MTR.
< Value C : Doubles times selected in TG.
< Value D : Triples MTR and doubles TG.

• Parameter [ 24 ] : Decision criterion for relevelling direction.
In this parameter, the decision criterion for direction of movement during re-levelling is defined.
< Value A : relevelling function disconnected.
< Value B : through terminal k.

< Value C : compatibility with old directive by terminal k.
Depending on the presence or absence of voltage on terminal K (P2), relevelling will be carried out by control unit in
one direction or the other:
No voltage on terminal K: relevelling in up direction.

24Vdc on terminal K: relevelling in down direction.
• Parameter [25] :
< Value A : Without next floor.
< Value B : With next floor.
< Value C : It actives on consecutives servicies of shorts floors (1P, 3C type).

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Parameter [ 26 ] : Representation in permanent out-of-service display.
< Value A: Representation of the two lower floors alternately.
< Value B, C, and D: Representation of the floor where the car is parked.
• Parameter [ 27 ] : firefighter.
< Value A : Standard.
< Value B : U36
< Value C : Australia firefighter 119CC1 + terminal k open door contact.
< Valor D : Australia firefighter 119CC1 + open door timer.
• Parameter [ 28 ] : Parameters display.
By pressing PL1, all parameters introduced sequentially may be viewed in this parameter.
To display parameters 7 and 8, they should have value A.
Parameter [ 29 ] : Analysis sticked contactor.
< Value A : Stop + movement.

< Value B : Stop.
• Parameter [ 30 ] : STOP function motor temperature.
< Value A : Terminal J motor temperature. STOP parameter 33.

< Value B : terminal F (together with overload). STOP terminal J.
• Parameter [ 32 ] : Alarm filtering. It is necessary an auxiliary board MBEN81-28.
• Parameter [ 33 ] : It activates Stop function and it let to choose input terminal. You can choose 3 different input
terminals can be choosen:
< Value B : Terminal 120 of CC1 conector

< Value C : Terminal 120 of CH1 conector
< Value D : Terminal K
This parameter will be operative only if parameter 30 has selected option A.
• Parameter [ 34 ]_ : It activates permanent out of order light function and it let to choose output terminal. You can
choose between 3 differents input terminal:

< Value D : Terminal G
• Parameter [ 35 ] : It activates permanent out of order keyswitch function and it let to choose input terminal. You
can choose between 3 differents input terminal:

< Value D : Terminal 118 of CC1 conector

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
< Parameter [ 36 ] : It defines which input terminal will be used on type 3C speed change. You can choose between
3 differents input terminals:

< Value C : Terminal 119 of CC1 conector
< Value D : Terminal 120 of CH1 conector
• Parameter [ 37 ] : A presence door cab additional contact is incorporated on installations with Automatic Door and
Electric Cam. This contact let to the system to know that the door is closed and it is not neccesary to activate the
electric cam. You can choose 3 differents input terminals:

< Value C : Terminal 119 of CC1 conector
< Value D : Terminal 118 of CC1 conector
• Parameter [ 38 ]: It activates Attendant mode. Lift is controlled by one people: the elevator operator. The elevator
operator choose the start movement and direction movement, by means of 2 pushbuttons on cab . Terminals:
< Value A : CC117 -It indicates to cab to start by up calls.

< Value B : CC118 -It indicates to cab to start bu down calls.
< Value C : CC119 -Functionality activation
• Parameter [ 39 ]: It is a complement to out of order functionality. It let to choose door state when this function is
activated :
< Value A : Open Doors.

< Value B : Closed Doors.
• Parameter [ 40 ]: Simulation mode. With this parameter it is possible to simulate certain installation real elements.
3 options :
< Value B : It simulates cab movement ( Terminal stopping switches, pulses and level)
< Value C : It simulates random calls cab generation.
< Value D : Both
• Parameter [ 41 ]: Output selection to activate 2nd speed bank. 3 options :
< Value B : Out G

< Value C : Terminal CC1-120
< Value D : Terminal CH1-120
• Parameters 49-63 : We select, by floor, change type to approximation speed. You can choose between 3 change
types:
< Value B : 2C mode

< Value C : 1P mode
< Value D : 3C mode. It is not possible to apply in 2 consecutives floors.
4.2.4. Basic functional operations
4.2.4.1. Commissioning. Return Control Unit
< Actuation of main switch QIG leads to the following:
< led 5V on, red: supply in microcontroller area.

< led 24V on, red: supply with 24Vdc.
< led RMT on, green: supply with 24Vdc correct.
These three led indicator lights must always be active during normal operation of lift. In the course of 3 seconds after
the luminous sequence, a number corresponding to the software version appears on the 3 displays. Note it down in
case you need to contact MACPUARSA.
After commissioning, return control unit will automatically be carried out.
< Return control unit (correction on lowest and highest floors).
< The information of block 1 indicated on display is blinking.

< Selection of correction direction:
! If the car is situated on intermediate floors, correction is effected on furthest floor, as defined in parameter
[21] (value A: lowest floor; value B: highest floor).
! If car is situated on lowest or highest floors (stopping switch open), it directly goes into normal operation.
There is no movement of the lift, except for the special case stipulated in the next point.
! In case of hydraulic lifts on lowest or highest floors (stopping switch open) and between floors, relevelling will

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
be carried out by actuating a call to the next floor.
After completion of return control unit, information is displayed in block 1 (4.1.2.2.3), not flashing.
Return control unit always begins after luminous sequence, when the lift undergoes a miscorrection (example: through
lack of pulses) and after completion of an inspection operation.
All other indicator lights and relays are connected as in normal unit.
4.1.4.2. Normal operation
Once the lift is parked, the following information alternately appears on the displays:
IN CASE OF SEMIAUTOMATIC LANDING DOORS IN CASE OF AUTOMATIC LANDING DOORS
1 SEC.
1 SEC.
CURRENT POSITION CURRENT POSITION

OF CAR OF CAR
In the first case, there is indication of door series being closed (central point on display active): SP (door series), and
of there being no possibility for starting, as door locks are not closed (A08); logical, as in this case, there is no closure
(whereby cam is actuated or car doors are closed), as long as there is no door movement.
In the case of automatic landing doors, door series is bridged (central point on display always active). At closing door
locks, display-point on left-hand side is activated. This is normally the case, as lift is stationed with closed doors. The
information (AAA) shows that lift is ready for service and capable of performing any requested run.
It may happen that the information does not appear as described above. For example:
• the central display-point is not active (SP): indicates that door series or a previous contact of the safety series is
open.
• (A08) or (AAA) do not appear: another cause prevents readiness for service (example: (A07) photocell in car
covered). See tables with possible causes which prevent run of lift in chapter 3.
If a call is actuated in this situation and the lift is ready to serve this demand, the normal sequence is as follows:
• closure of car door and actuation of cam. For this purpose, relay ROPA is deactivated, and relay ROPC, as well as
high-speed relay RVR, (led DL6) are activated. In case of electric lifts, ascent relay RS, (led DL3) or descent relay
RB, (led DL4) are activated, whereby the corresponding contact (relay) is connected. If there is cam, the external
relay of PCB MicroBASIC (RLE) is connected. In case of hydraulic lifts, only relay (RLE), which actuates the cam,
is connected.
• once all series are closed (display-point on left-hand side active), interlock circuit, relay RM, with intermittent,
red led indicator light: DL5, is activated. In case of hydraulic lifts, RS, with DL3 or RB, with led DL4, is activated.
In case of hydraulic lifts, relay RET (without led in the upper left-hand corner of the relay block on PCB
MicroBASIC) produces the delay between the main switch relay (KCG) and run (KCM, direct starting) or the time
of the star phase, (star/delta starting).
• during movement, information on displays (block 1) alternately shows present position of the lift and type of call
as well as floor served.
Between two floors, 2 pulses coming from the photoswitch will be received. These appear on the display-point on
the right-hand side (IMP). Furthermore, the NO LEVEL led is always active (green), with the exception of the
short moment of levelling at each stop.
• at change of speed (once the last pulse of the photoswitch is reached), relay RVR (led DL6) is deactivated.
Information block 1 of the displays has the following indication:

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
1 SEC.
PRESENT POSITION
OF CAR
• once the point of levelling is reached (signal 207: 0Vdc, open), NO LEVEL led is switched off and relay RM
(intermittent led DL5) drops. Shortly afterwards, ascent relay RS (red led DL4) or descent relay (RB, led DL3)
also drops.
4.2.4.3. Inspection operation
• Inspection operation is initiated by actuation of inspection switch. By means of this switch the circuit between
terminals 24Vdc and 208 is closed:
! relay RMR (led DL1) of PCB MicroBASIC is activated.

! any activity of control unit just taking place is stopped.
! car and landing doors (if any) are closed.
! information block 1 of the displays has the following indication:
1 SEC.
INDICATES THAT INSPECTION

CONTROL UNIT IS OPERATING
! If, for example, (A06) appears instead of (AAA), information is provided that car may not be moved in
inspection operation, as door series is open; see table with causes which prevent movement of lift, in
document 4.
• In order to make the lift move under inspection operation, the same point 208 is used as control station (ascent
and descent) which at actuation of pushbuttons for last and first car call, respectively, is supplied with (24Vdc).
PLEASE NOTE: During inspection operation, the lift may not be moved further than stopping switches; that is,
once, during ascent, the upper stopping switch is reached, the lift stops and is only able to continue in down
direction.
• In order to change from inspection operation to normal operation, change inspection switch, disconnect relay
RMR (led DL1) and actuate return control unit (correction).
VERY IMPORTANT: When accessing the car roof, inspection control unit should be active.
4.2.4.4. Emergency operation
Only used in hydraulic lifts.
In case of hydraulic lifts, MicroBASIC control panel is provided with a thermomagnetic switch QIB (6A) which must
always be activated, except if control unit will not be operating for a long period. Thus, the battery may be recharged
from the PCB MicroBASIC loader during normal operation and will be able to supply energy in case of emergency
operation. Normal voltage of battery must be between 13 and 13.8Vdc (except in unloaded condition). IMPORTANT:
Check regularly for correct voltage.
PCB MicroBASIC is provided with a drain sensor for the lower battery voltage. Once this voltage reaches a value of
approximately 9 Vdc, emergency control unit is disconnected and aborted.
Emergency control unit may be actuated in case of the following:
• power failure (energy supply from mains disconnected), therefore led indicator lights RMT (DL8), 24V (DL10) and
5V (DL9) are switched off.
• thermomagnetic switch QIB (6 A) is activated.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• there must be a factor informing about end of emergency operation. There are two possibilities:
A) emergency operation is finished once the lift has reached next floor in down direction. For this purpose,
magnet switches 326, 327, 328 or photoswitch (MAC 524/12) may be used: supply is from points +12F and
0Vdc, and their LEVELLER outlet is connected to terminals 207 and 0Vdc. In this case, jumper J1 (lower right-
hand area of PCB MicroBASIC) must be fixed. The green NO LEVEL led is always luminous while lift is between
floors. That is, in this case, lift will only perform emergency operation if led NO LEVEL is active.
B) in the second case, emergency operation is completed at any other point of the run of lift, generally on the
lowest floor.
In this context, the following points must be accurate:
! do not fix jumper J1 (lower right-hand area of PCB MicroBASIC).
! install additional contact in shaft which is connected to terminals 5 and 0Vdc, normally closed. Opening of this
contact leads to end of emergency operation (CFE).
• in addition to the points mentioned, it is necessary that all contacts of the safety series are closed, so that
emergency operation may be initiated.
• if all previously points are accurate, there is a voltage of 12Vdc which is the voltage the battery has at this
moment, minus the voltage drop on cables at terminals 281 (+) and 280 (-), points of connection of emergency
valve. Indicator light EMER, (red flashing indicator light) is switched on while outlet for emergency valve is
energised. NO LEVEL indicator light stays on, until lift is at floor level.
4.2.4.5. Other operations and functions
4.2.4.5.1. Opening and closing of doors
• Normal operation of car doors
If lift is provided with automatic landing doors and is stationed with doors closed, doors may be opened:
! From outside : by pressing call button.
! From car : by pressing door open button or call button for the floor on which car is situated.
If lift is closing doors to initiate run, closure of doors may be aborted:
! From outside : by pressing call button corresponding with service defined as next service to be carried out by car.
! From car : by interrupting photocell beam, by actuating microswitch for door sensitivity (presence of obstacle), or
by pressing door open button or call button for the floor on which the car is situated.
In this case, door opening time is equal to door closing time, plus two seconds.
After the end of a run, command is given to open doors within a fixed time TG. Once this time has passed, command is
given to close doors, if calls not yet served are memorised or if landing doors are automatic.
• Repeated door close or lock error.
Control unit will close doors and actuate cam within a fixed time TG.
If series cannot be closed, command is given to open doors and/or cam is disconnected. This is followed by a
renewed attempt at closing, up to 12 times maximum. If series cannot be closed, lift changes into condition
called ‘temporary out of service or FST’. On PCB MicroBASIC display, error F05 is indicated which remains
memorised for later display. In this situation, the lift does not serve any landing calls. In order to return to
normal operation, there must be a car call.
• Interruption of photoelectric cell in car or opening of automatic landing door.
If beam of photoelectric cell in car is interrupted, if door open button is pressed or microswitch for door sensitivity
is open, or semiautomatic landing door remains open for more than 48 seconds, lift changes into a temporary out
of service and does not serve any landing calls (error F12 or F11 are indicated). In order to return to normal
operation it is sufficient that the respective component changes into the closed circuit condition for five
consecutive seconds.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2.4.5.2. Relevelling
FB
RELEVELLING DURING DESCENT B FS Shaft configuration
when using PCB 538
FLOOR D E C
RELEVELLING DURING ASCENT A
FZS
AREA CPS
K2 K3 K1 Safety series
jumper
00 103 PCB 538
• Levelling area (D) : area which defines stopping of car. Established by contact connected to terminals 207 and 0Vdc
(leveller):
< Open : within levelling area.

< Closed : outside levelling area.
• Relevelling area : once car reaches this area, control unit is informed that relevelling must be initiated.
Conventionally, this function is fulfilled by means of the same levelling component and/or contact of the safety
area, in order to keep the number of components in shaft as low as possible. A is the relevelling area in ascent and
B is the relevelling area in descent.
As standard in MicroBASIC, relevelling is initiated at leaving of levelling area, that is, when contact between
terminals 207 and 0Vdc closes (leveller closed).
Normally, this solution is acceptable. Exceptions are cases in which levelling area is very short (hydraulic lifts with
great stopping precision) and/or in which frequency and risk of misregulation are very high (example: hydraulic car
lifts).
For such situations, there is an entry by means of which, at energising with 24Vdc, control unit is informed that
relevelling area is reached (only in this case relevelling begins). For this purpose, parameter 11 must be configured
with value C. In this case, an additional component must be fixed in shaft which closes contact by energising with
24Vdc at entry.
• Relevelling direction : if car escapes from levelling area in up direction, relevelling must occur in down direction. If
car escapes in down direction, relevelling must occur in up direction. Depending on the value of parameter 24,
control unit offers two possibilities for relevelling. See parameter [24] in section 4.1.3.2.
• Safety area : area within unlocking area of landing doors in which a safety contact or circuit may be fixed for
bridging of door series, locks and car (connections 103-104, 104-105, 105-106), so that relevelling will take place
with open doors (EN-81).
Safety area is defined by its safety contact or circuit which is connected between terminals 00 and 103, from
group CC2:
! safety circuit open: outside of safety area.
! safety circuit closed: within safety area.
PCB MicroBASIC always connects terminals (00) and (106) internally, thereby bridging door series, locks and car,
when relevelling is initiated or when car finishes slow-speed run (see special function ‘approach with open
doors’).
If at beginning of relevelling, there is a voltage of 110 Vac on terminal (00, that is, a safety contact or circuit is
externally bridged (103 with 00)), control unit starts relevelling, without changing condition of doors.
Further features of relevelling in MicroBASIC control units:
Parameter 18 enables delaying initiation of relevelling.
Control unit always effects relevelling as quickly as possible.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
In certain situations, relevelling control unit is not actuated, as this would make no sense in practice (example:
lift initiates new run).
The installation (leveller 538) + magnetic kit switch 327/328, is provided with all functions for relevelling and
approach with open doors. These functions are applicable both to hydraulic and electric lifts.
• Approach with open doors.
Parameter 22 enables decision about whether this function is to be actuated.
Approach with open doors may be carried out during slow-speed run of car (in approach area). A safety contact
or circuit must be used which informs about door unlocking area and which in turn bridges door series, locks and
car (terminals 103, 104|104, 105|105, 106). Connection at points (00) and (103, of CC2). This component is also
used for relevelling with open doors.
During slow-speed run, PCB MicroBASIC tests voltage on terminal (00). If there is 110 Vac, this terminal is
connected internally with (106, thereby bridging series) and command is given to open doors.
• Stopping on lowest floor (hydraulic lifts)
If lift remains stationed for more than 14 minutes without running, it is automatically returned to lowest floor.
Only operative in hydraulic lifts if parameter [16] = d.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.2.4.5.3. Fireman control unit
There are two types of lift, concerning fireman control unit. Lifts prepared for Fireman Use and lifts for Non Fireman
Use (fire).
• Non fireman use (fire):
Activation by closing of circuit on terminal 10 (CH2).

In this case, fireman’s key switch in car, terminal 9 (CC2), is not bridged. It should remain free.
When activating terminal 10 (CH2), the lift will go to the fireman floor which has been configured, will open doors
and once the door timer time has passed (TG), it will close them. In this situation, neither car calls nor landing
calls are served.
If it is disconnected and re-activated in less than 5 seconds, fireman’s key switch will open and close doors.
• Fireman Use:
Activation by closing of circuit on terminal 10 (CH2).

In this case, fireman’s key switch in car, terminal 9 (CC2), must be bridged.
Move lift to the fireman floor which has been configured (parameter [2]).
Once reached, doors will open and will remain open. In order to register a call, button should be pressed until half
the door clear entrance is closed; otherwise, doors begin once again to open. Once closure is completed, lift starts
moving. Once on the floor, doors will not open, unless button PAP is pressed, at least, until half the door clear
entrance has open. In this case, doors will remain open. If button PAP is no longer pressed and half the door clear
entrance is not still open, doors begin to close again.
If fireman’s key switch in shaft is disconnected and re-activated in less than 5 seconds, lift doors will close and lift
will return to fireman floor, where doors will open and close.
If stationed at fireman floor, doors will open and close.
4.2.4.5.4. Mixed selective control unit
This function is only applicable in case of simplex configuration.
In addition to the current functions of selective control unit in descent and ascent, MicroBASIC facilitates operation in
mixed selective control unit. Several landing calls to lower floors may operate as selective control unit in ascent. The
remaining higher floors then operate as selective control unit in descent. This may for example be useful in buildings
with garages.
Configuration technique:
• Parameter [4] : with value C, operates in mixed selective control unit.
• Parameter [5] : with value B, enables provision of the highest floor of those configured as selective control unit in
ascent, with 2 landing pushbuttons, one for ascent and one for descent. In order to achieve this function,
parameter 4 must have value C.
• Parameter [6] : defines number of lower floors which operate in selective control unit in ascent.
Mixed selective control unit is applicable to buildings with up to 10 or 9 floors, if parameter 5 receives value B (two
landing pushbuttons on main floor).
4.2.4.5.5. Asymmetric lifts
If one of the lifts of a duplex installation has no access to any final floor, it is called asymmetric.
This function is only applicable in case of duplex configuration.
In both lifts, parameters [0] and [1], corresponding to the number of floors of the installation, must be configured with
the same value (the total number of floors in the building).
The displays for the binary input connected to both control units must have the same programming (sequence). This
must also coincide with the total number of floors of the installation.
In parcel for connection of car calls (CC1) terminals corresponding with floors on which lift does not stop (due to
absence of pushbutton on car control station) must remain free.
• Parameter [7] : defines number of floors in lower area on which lift does not stop.
• Parameter [8] : defines number of floors in upper area on which lift does not stop. That is, asymmetry may occur
either in lower or upper area; moreover, one lift may be asymmetric on lower floors and the other may be
asymmetric on upper floors.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.3. Printed circuit board AMB1
4.3.1. Main components Extension

inputs/outputs
(*)
Serial communication RS485
Printed circuit board AMB1 is always
b a
C42
S/N
installed to a MicroBASIC board, thus
IO
(T1-T2 MicroBASIC)
increasing its features, as explained in
UDN2987
C98
U16
D26
TXD
chapter 1.
DL3
R252 D48
100
D47
DZ31 R220
Q3
C29 R56
125
D45
D46
Description of terminals:
DZ32 R219
R83
R84
R85
R86
R87
R88
R89
R90
R251 R227
C43
PTT
C28 R55
DL5
124
D50
D49
R242 DZ30 R218
Q1
UDN2987
U17
Plug connections (9) and (8).
123
C30 R57
D51
D52
DZ29 R217
R226 R244
110 Common for outside calls (+24 Vdc).
RXD
122
D42
Landing call up
C31 R58
DL4
D41
R243 DZ28 R216
100 Common for register calls (0 Vdc).
121
Q2
D43
R91 C26 R53
R98
R97
R96
R95
R94
R93
R92
D44
R249 C85 DZ27 R215
120
D39
R224 R250
C27 R54
U34
The printed circuit board must be mounted
C105 D40
119
R214
T2
DZ26
D38
R248
C104
C25 R52
with an earthed special separating

D37
V4
118
U20
D58
1487
R223
DZ25 R191
increment in the holes marked with a ( * ).

C24 R51
U33
C103
T1
117
D57
D59
R247
C90 DZ24 R213
It is assembled on earthed metal plate.

C84
R235 R236 C34 R61
U30
116
D55
SYMAC2000 D60
R173 DZ23 R212
C63
1232
R254
C35 R62
115
D54
154 D56 DZ22
R259 R211
R237
R238
114
D63
R258 R256 R255 R257 C33 R60
R245
D53 JP1
*
DZ21 R210
113
D62
C32 R59
R246
C65
ST90T40
D64
DZ20 R209
112
D66
C37 R64
To replace AMB1 with board AMB1 •,
D61
U29
111
DZ19 R208
D67
XT1
C36 R63
D65 R207
R192
110
F2
DZ18 R65
C64
C38
D68
DZ17
U3 R1
R66
C39
U2
D25
DZ16
fix jumper SYMAC2000
C83
C82 C18
R45
U32
D28
C102
DZ15
R206
100
R205
R149
C19
R148
D24 R46
D27
126
DZ14 R204
+
C17 R44
C92
D21
D23
125
C101
VR1
U31
DL1 DZ13 R203
Jumper (JP1) must be fixed

1 D73 C16 R43
D22
124
D32
DZ12 R202
+
R82
C21 R48
D31
123
U15
D29
DZ11 R201
Landing call down

R79 R81
R241
R80
C91
D30
122
C20 R47
D33
in the upper area

UDN2987
DZ10 R200
R78
C75
D34
C22 R49 121

R77
TW2 D36
DZ9 R190
R76
D35
120
C41
C23 R50
D16
U35
R75 DZ8 R199

D15
119
C13 R40
D13
D14
118
TW1
DL2
R67
DZ7 R198
C2 C12 R39
U14
D17
D18
117
R221
R68
R69
C1
DZ6 R197
C14 R41
D19
116
D20
R70
DZ5
UDN2987
R196
C15 R42
D10
115
R150
R71
R72 D9
DZ4 R195
R73
C99
C40
114
D11
C10 R37
D12
R74 DZ3 R194
113
D7
C11 R38
D8
DZ2 R193
112
D6
R36
C8 DZ1 C9
D2 D72 D5
V3
R189
111
F1
R35
110
SILK-SCREENING OF BOARD AMB1

(+) (-)
+24 VREG 0VCC
(*)
24 Vdc Rated voltage:

MicroBASIC 24Vdc (bridge between VREG and +24)
4.3.2. Information provided by the board
The printed circuit board AMB1 does not include display for viewing information. This information is however offered by
PCB MicroBASIC, as it does without the extension. Possible errors of the installation are also registered on PCB
MicroBASIC.
It does include LED indicator lights providing the following information:
• DL1: Internal power supply (+5 V).

• DL2: External power supply (+24 V).
• DL3, DL4: Connected serial communication.
• DL5: Data transmission.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.3.3. Configuration of parameters
If an installation includes the AMB1 board, control unit configuration is directly carried out on it, as explained in the
following tables.
PARAMETERS VALUE
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
DISPLAYED
MICROSWITCHES FUNCTION ON ON ON ON
NUMBER OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
NUMBER OF FLOORS 5 - 9 - 13 2 - 6 - 10 - 14 3 - 7 - 11 - 15 4 - 8 - 12 - 16
OF THE INSTALLATION
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
2-3-4 5-6-7-8 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 13 - 14 - 15 - 16
1 2 3 4 5 6
FLOOR WITH FIREMAN’S
ON
OFF KEY SWITCH 1º 2º 3º 4º
1 2 3 4 5 6 MANUAL
AUTOMATIC
ON TYPE OF SEMI-
OFF LANDING DOORS AUTOMATIC
1 2 3 4 5 6 SELECTIVE
UNIVERSAL SELECTIVE MIXED IN ASCENT
ON OPERATING MODE
SELECTIVE AND
OFF
DESCENT
1 2 3 4 5 6
TYPE OF INSTALLATION AMB1 AMB2
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON NOT USED
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
No. OF FLOORS IN LOWER
ON
OFF
AREA FOR ASYMMETRIC LIFT 0 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON No. OF FLOORS IN UPPER
OFF 0 1 2 3
AREA FOR ASYMMETRIC LIFT
1 2 3 4 5 6
SPEED SPEED
ON
OFF TYPE OF LIFT ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT
CHANGE 1C CHANGE 2C
1 2 3 4 5 6 Hydraulic 0.2
AUXILIARY 1 2 3
ON TIMER (SEC) Phase 8 DIRECT
OFF Elec. Forced
Draught 5 10 18 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 - OVERTEMP.
- OVERTEMP. - OVERTEMP. - OVERTEMP.
ON AUXILIARY INPUT - RPA - RPA
OFF - RPA - RPA
FUNCTIONS - ELECTRIC - START OF
- PCP - GONG
GENERATOR RELEVELLING
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON STANDARD
TYPE OF HYDRAULIC
OFF
POWER UNIT
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON - COMING - DIRECTION
AUXILIARY OUTPUT - COMING - OCCUPIED
OFF + STANDSTILL ARROWS
FUNCTIONS - CAM - CAM
- CAM - CAM
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF 1 - 5 - 9 - 13 2 - 6 - 10 - 14 3 - 7 - 11 - 15 4 - 8 - 12 - 16
MAIN FLOOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF 1-2-3-4 5-6-7-8 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 13 - 14 - 15 - 16

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
PARAMETERS VALUE
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF
DISPLAYED
NUMBER MICROSWITCHES FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON NO RETURN
OFF IMMEDIATE 1 MINUTE 14 MINUTES
1 2 3 4 5 6 FLOORS WITH RETURN

ON TO MAIN FLOOR. IN LOWEST 2 LOWEST 3 LOWEST
OFF HYDRAULIC LIFTS STANDARDS ALL FLOORS FLOOR FLOORS FLOORS
REQUIRE OPTION “A”.
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON DECELERATION FOR 0.5 1 2 5
OFF RELEVELLING
1 2 3 4 5 6 DOES NOT
ON NO DELETE IF SERIES MAX. No. MAX. No.
DELETION OF CAR CALLS OR PHOTOCELL
OFF DELETION OF CAR OF CAR
ARE SWITCHED
CALLS: 3 CALLS: 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
OPTIONS FOR TYPE A
ON TYPE B TYPE C
DIRECTION INDICATOR STANDARD
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON RETURN FLOOR LOWEST UPPER
OFF FLOOR FLOOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON APPROACH WITH OPEN DOORS NOT ACTIVE
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON DOUBLING TIMERS
(MTR and/or TG) NONE MTR TG BOTH
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON DECISION CRITERION FOR NO ON TERMINAL K
OFF RELEVELLING DIRECTION RELEVELLING
1 2 3 4 5 6
ACTIVE IN
ON OMRON INVERTER NO NEAR NEAR FLOOR
CONSECUTIVE
OFF FLOOR
FLOORS 1P, 3C
1 2 3 4 5 6
REPRESENTATION LOWER FLOORS
ON PRESENT PRESENT PRESENT
IN PERMANENT ALTERNATELY
OFF FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR
OUT-OF-SERVICE DISPLAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 AUSTRAL. FIRE. AUSTRAL. FIRE.

U36 119 CC1 + 119CC1 +
ON FIREFIGHTERS STANDAR
OFF OPEN DOOR OPEN DOOR
CONTACT TIMER
1 2 3 4 5 6
PARAMETERS
ON DISPLAY
OFF (PRESS PL1)
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON STICKED CONTACTER ANALYSIS
OFF STOPPED + STOPPED
MOVEMENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 ENGINE TEMP. TERMINAL F
ON ENGINE TEMPERATURE ON TERMINAL K TOGETHER WITH
OFF STOP FUNCTION STOP OVERLOAD
PARAMETER 33 STOP TERM. J
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON UTILITIES SENDING RECEPTION
AUTO CHECK
OFF
VIA SERIES VIA SERIES
PARAMETERS PARAMETERS

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
PARÁMETROS VALUE
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
ON ON ON ON
FUNCIÓN
NUMBER
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON CALLS FILTERING YES
NO
OFF (terminal G )
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON STOP terminal K
OFF
NO Terminal CH1- Terminal CH1-
118 117
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON PERMANENT SERVICE terminal CH1-
NO terminal CH1- terminal CH1-
OFF OUT LIGHT 120
119 118
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON PERMANENT SERVICE
NO terminal CH1- terminal CH1- terminal CH1-
OFF OUT CAM
117 118 120
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON NO Terminal CH1- Terminal CH1- terminal CH1-
3C SHORT FLOOR
OFF 120 118 117
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON AUTOMATIC DOOR NO terminal CH1- terminal CH1- terminal CH1-
OFF AND ELECTRIC CAM
119 118 120
1 2 3 4 5 6 CH117:indicate CH118:indicate CH119:

ON to car to star by to car to star by functional
OFF
ATTENDANT MODE up call down call activation
1 2 3 4 5 6
Closed
ON OUT OF ORDER Open
OFF DOOR PARK
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON NO Car
OFF SIMULATION MODE Calls Both
Motion
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON OUT ACTIVATION N/A 120 CH1 119 CH1 118 CH1
OFF 2nd SPEED BENCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
PARAMETERS VALUE
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
ON ON ON ON
NUMBER
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF
1,2
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF
2,3
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 3,4
1 2 3 4 5 6
1C 2C 1P 3C
OFF 4,5
1 2 3 4 5 6
5,6
1C 2C 1P 3C
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
FLOOR CHANGE TYPE
6,7
1C 2C 1P 3C
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 7,8
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
8,9
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF
1C 2C 1P 3C
9,10
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 10,11
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 11,12
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
12,13
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 13,14
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF FLOOR CHANGE TYPE 1C 2C 1P 3C
14,15
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF 15,16
4.3.4 Operation
Operation is identical to MicroBASIC simplex control unit, but more features are included, as indicated in chapter 1.

100
110
chapter 1.
SERIAL COM. RS485 SERIAL COM. RS485
(T1-T2 MBAS) (T1-T2 MBAS)
LIFT 1 LIFT 2
24 Vdc µB 24 Vdc µB
V3.02, NOV.05
ASC. 2 ASC. 1
(-) (+) (-) (+) V5 T1 T2 V8 T1 T2
A2 A1 1 V9
C51
R225
R122
+
R232
R227
R138
R139
(*) R135 R133
R126
R7
Description of terminals:
F1 C49 R226
C60
R230
F2
R120
R31
C53
R6 R136
C58
R114
4.4.1. Main components
D70 D69 R8 C57

CON1
C52
CON3
CON2
C119 R105
T1
BAT D3
BAT
R106
R228
R127 SERIAL COM. RS485
U8
C146
D79 V4 PS1 D4 MAX1480 MAX1480 R119
C50
C143
C118
R152
MAX1480
C130 (T1-T2 MBAS)
R235
R236
R110
DL4 R237 DL5 LIFT 3
T2
R238 D77 R153
R108
TW4
R109
D75 R132 C120 R130 R104
4.4. Printed circuit board AMB2
C63 R125 C123 C121
L1
+
D78
U2 R123
R103
U3 C4 C56
C122
V6
D1
R5
R121
C1 R4 C61
R148 + U12 R3 U35 U41 R118
C75 C72 R134 R140 TR1
D71
F3 1232 R112 U25
TW1
C81
C67
+
TW3
C71 C48
R111
C70
U30 R173 U46
C133
C64 XL1 R1
R151
U51
HC20
6
C65
1
HC244
(+)
R223
+
R156
C2
+ TW2 C3
V16
SAA1064
4N26
24 Vdc µB R154 R222 D76
(-)
SERIAL COMM.
MAX250
C79 U52
Common for outside calls (+24 Vdc).
ASC. 3 C76 U43 (*). It is assembled on earthed metal plate.
R155
R171
C82
U1
DL3 RS232C
R183
A3 R233 +
+
X3 C66 X2 C80
V15
TELECONTROL
C134
U42
LM2825 U53
C78 R224
V2
R184
U45
9
5
R185
V3
MAX251
ST90T40 R181 1 2 3 4 U54
U31
U34
U33
U32
U55
V14
4N26
R149 DL1
R167
R168
R169
R170
R163
R164
R165
R166
R234 U44 C147
R188
R159 C132
U28
R182
F4 R150 C68 D1 D2 D3 D4 +
R158
R221
R162
(*)
4N26
DL6
C129
C83
R187
Plug connections CHB1, CHB2 (9) and CHS1, CHS2 (8).
R157 R113
U27 R229
C54
C59
D74
MIC5841
R161
U37
(+)
+
U29
HC244
XL2
PFC8573
RS-232C
24 Vdc µB CV1 R129
(-)
TW5
U36 R231
R160
ASC. 4 D72 DL2 X1 C69 C77 C62
C22 R83
R186
R175
U16
T1
D2
C26
C27
C25
C24
C20 C36 C38 R98 R84
R131
A4 C11 C9
U17
R75 R176
R76 R174
R77 R177
R78 R180
R79 R178
R80 R179
R81
R82
R117
R74
R72
R71
R70
R69
R68
R67
R73 R97 SERIAL COM. RS485
R85
C117
+24
C10 C8
C23
C21
C39
C37
R96 R86 (T1-T2 MBAS)
C55
R147
RATED R95
C47
T2
Page 108
R94
LIFT 4
VREG
MAX1480
VOLTAGE
U20
HC165
R143
HC165 HC165 HC165 R145
U21
U19
U18
R93
R115
24 Vdc (BRIDGE R142
UDN2987 C45 UDN2987 R92 V7
CON4
U15
UDN2987
C44
C46
UDN2987
C116
C43
C28
0VCC
R90 R89 R88 R87
C42
TW8
U14
BETWEEN R91 TW9
C30 C29
VREG AND +24) C40 C41
R146
V12 PS3
C15
C14
C12
C13
C16
C17
C19
C18
C32
C33
C35
C34
TW6 PS2 TW7 C31 R144
PS4 PS5
D68
C145
U47
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
D25
D5 D8 D12 D9 D20 D17 D13 D16 D36 D33 D29 D32 D21 D24 D28 D65 D61 D64 D53 D56 D60 D57 D37 D40 D44 D41 D52 D49 C144
DZ1
DZ2
DZ3
C92
DZ4
DZ5
DZ6
DZ7
DZ8
DZ16
DZ15
DZ14
DZ13
C95
DZ12
DZ11
C99
C94
C93
C91
C90
C89
C88
C87
C86
C85
C84
C96
DZ17
DZ18
C101
DZ19
DZ20
DZ21
DZ10
C102
C100
C103
C104
DZ22
C115
DZ23
C114
DZ24
C113
DZ32
C112
DZ31
C111
DZ30
C110
DZ29
C109
DZ28
C108
DZ27
C107
DZ26
C106
DZ25
C105
U49 V11
D48
C98
F5
b
EXTENSION
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a
R35
R36
R38
R37
R42
R41
R39
R40
R50
R49
R47
R48
R43
R44
R46
R66
R65
R63
R64
R59
R60
R62
R61
R51
R52
R54
R53
R58
R57
R55
R56
R189
R194
R195
R196
R197
R198
R199
R190
R200
R201
R202
R203
R204
R205
R192
R207
R208
R209
R210
R211
R212
R213
R191
R214
R215
R216
R217
R218
R219
R220
R193
U48
D6 D7 D11 D10 D19 D18 D14 D15 D35 D34 D30 D31 D22 D23 D27 D67 D66 D62 D63 D54 D55 D59 D58 D38 D39 D43 D42 D51 D50 D46 D47 D26 D45
U50 IO
V10
ROW 1
V13 CHB2 CHS2
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 100
S/N
ROW 2 CHB1 CHS1
LANDING CALL DOWN LANDING CALL UP

Common for registers/calls (0 Vdc), except in universal control unit, which is 110 of CH1 of MicroBASIC.
Printed circuit board AMB2 is always installed to a MicroBASIC board, thus increasing its features, as explained in
MTIPIEPMB302GB
The printed circuit board must be mounted with an earthed special separating increment in the holes marked with a
SILK-SCREENING OF BOARD AMB2

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.4.2. Information provided by the board
The information indicator of the MicroBASIC printed circuit board with the AMB1 and AMB2 extensions provides the
same information as the standard MicroBASIC control unit, both in LED-indicators and in the 3 digits on the display.
When the PCB MicroBASIC operates with AMB2, in the case of down (Figure 1) or up (Figure 2) landing calls, only the
call, as allocated in real-time through the AMB2 printed circuit board is indicated. In order to display all stored landing
calls, information provided by the AMB2 printed circuit board must be displayed.
Figure 1 Figure 2
AMB2 printed circuit board includes the following information indicators:
• 13 led light indicators.

• 1 4-digit display.
4.4.2.1. Led light indicators
• Every single one of the four possible voltage feeders ( +, - ) with 24 Vdc which exit from the MicroBASIC control
units, have a green led-indicator for verification of each connected voltage. Each led-indicator is located in the
immediate area of the corresponding connection. If the led-indicator is not illuminated, although there is voltage
on the terminals, inspect the condition of the respective fuse.
• Next to the microprocessor is a green led which indicates that 5 Vdc are connected to the microprocessor.
• One green an one red led-indicator belong to each one of the four possible lifts. The following table indicates the
information displayed according to the led status.
RED LED STATUS GREEN LED STATUS STATUS OF LIFT DESCRIPTION
Cause :
• No connection.
ON OFF OUT OF SERVICE
• The lift is CONSTANTLY OUT OF SERVICE (control unit
indicator error).
Lift in :
OUT OF SERVICE • INSPECTION.
BLINKING ON
FOR PASSENGERS • FIREMAN operation.
• Emergency operation.
OUT OF SERVICE
BLINKING BLINKING RETURN (reset to initial position).
FOR PASSENGERS
OUT OF SERVICE LIFT TEMPORARILY OUT OF SERVICE:

BLINKING OFF
FOR PASSENGERS • Indication of cause in control unit.
IN SERVICE
OFF ON LIFT IS IDLE, safety series OPEN.
FOR PASSENGERS
OUT OF SERVICE
OFF SLOWLY BLINKING LIFT IS IDLE, safety series CLOSED.
FOR PASSENGERS
OUT OF SERVICE
OFF BLINKING LIFT OPERATING.
FOR PASSENGERS
OFF OFF NONE NOT APPLICABLE.
Notes:
Be certain that all 8 led-indicators respond simultaneously for some seconds upon switching on the control unit.
In PROGRAM mode, all 8 led-indicators are in the on position (see point 4.3.3.2).
In the stand-by mode, all 8 leds are in the off position (see point 4.3.4.2).

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.4.2.2. 4-Digit display
DISPLAY
PUSHBUTTONS
Under the display there are three pushbuttons enabling configuration of the printed circuit board and information about
it (see point 4.3.3.1 also).
The equipment has two modes of operation: RUN mode and PROGRAM mode. One switches between the two with the
P/R pushbutton.
4.4.2.2.1. RUN Mode: information indication
In this operating mode, information about lifts in operation can be indicated on the display. In order to view various
information, press button (<) and the following information will alternately appear:
• Stored landing calls, down.

• Stored landing calls, up.
• Present position and destination landing of the lifts (* 1).
• Time and date (* 2).
• List of past error messages registered by the control unit (* 3).
The remaining information can be retrieved with pushbutton (>) which pertain to the above mentioned blocks marked
with a (*):
• (* 1) Switching between the different lifts.

Information about present position and destination of lift (if any) is indicated cyclically.
• (* 2) Switching between time and date by pressing button (>).
• (* 3) By pressing button (>), one obtains the error messages from further in the past, in recorded time
segments. The following information alternately appears for each stored error message:
ERROR CODE No. OF LIFT AND No. OF FLOOR DATE TIME

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Flow Diagram: RUN Mode
DOWN CALLS IN MEMORY

ALTERNATING INDICATION OF
ALL STORED CALLS
UP CALLS IN MEMORY
ALTERNATING INDICATION OF
ALL STORED CALLS
3 (*)
LIFT 1 IS LOCATED AT
PRESS LANDING 4. WHEN BUTTON (>)
IS PRESSED, LOCATION OF THE
OTHER LIFTS IS SHOWN
TIME:
PRESSING BUTTON (>), THE
TIME IS SHOWN
5
(*)
PRESSING BUTTON (>), THE
PREVIOUS ERROR MESSAGES
APPEAR
(*) Alternating indication
LIFT IS LOCATED AT LANDING 4 AND RESPONDS TO THE DOWN

LANDING CALL FROM LANDING 12
ERROR CODE No. 13 LIFT 2 FLOOR 12 DATE OF THE ERROR

TIME OF THE ERROR

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.4.2.2.2. PROGRAM Mode: Information indication
In this operating mode, configuration parameters may be displayed and modified (also see point 4.3.3.2).
Initially, display shows a number of parameter PX; pressing (<) the desired number of parameter may be selected.
No. of parameter
Press (>)
Value of parameter
Pressing (>) the value of this parameter is indicated.
4.4.2.2.3. Special indications
• Blinking indications on the displays.
The control unit indicates that the stored information for the DATE and TIME are INCORRECT through a blinking
indicator in the RUN mode. Parameters 11 (time) and 12 (date) must be correspondingly re-programmed. Should
the date and time still be incorrectly shown, then the AMB2 circuit board must be replaced.
• Redundancy situation.
The MicroBASIC control unit with AMB2 circuit board can work redundantly (see chapter 4.3.4.2). In this case,
one AMB2 board functions in normal operation, while the other remains in STAND-BY mode, whereby the
indicator displays:
• Error Display.
The AMB2 circuit board stores the last 25 errors that occurred in the equipment and shows them on the
display.
Should an error occur, the current indication on the display goes out and the error message appears, alternately
showing all relevant information (also see chapter 4.3.5).

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.4.3. Configuration and adjustment of parameters
4.4.3.1. Configuration elements
If the AMB2 circuit board is included in an installation, parametrization is carried out both on the AMB2 board and on
the MicroBASIC control unit. Parametrization of the latter was described in point 4.1.3, even though in this case
parameters differ, and new functions and values are indicated in point 4.3.3.3.
The AMB2 circuit board can be configured with the assistance of the following elements:
• 4-digit display.
• 3 pushbuttons.
DISPLAY
PUSHBUTTONS
The equipment has two modes of operation: RUN mode and PROGRAM mode. One switches between the two with the
P/R pushbutton. Configuration should be carried out in PROGRAM mode.
4.4.3.2. PROGRAM Mode
In this operating mode in AMB2, the configuration parameters can be indicated and/or changed.
The various operating elements have the following functions :
• The 4-digit display informs of the selected parameter and the value at which it is currently set. Stores a new
value.
• P/R button switches between RUN and PROGRAM mode.
• Button (<) serves the purpose of selecting the parameter and positioning, changing the values within the display.
• Button (>) serves the purpose of indicating the value of the selected parameter and modifying the value of the
selected digit.
Operating mode:
• In RUN mode, pressing P/R switches to PROGRAM mode.
• In PROGRAM mode, the 8 led-indicators (4 pairs, one per lift) are in the on position. The received landing calls
are NOT deleted, but are NOT served by any lift while the PROGRAM mode is running.
• In order to select a parameter press (<) repeatedly, until the display indicates the desired parameter.
• Once selected, press (>) to display the value at which it is set. Left-hand digit will be blinking to indicate it is
being edited.
• In order to modify the value of the parameter press (<) until the digit to be changed appears (blinking). Then,
press (>) to modify the value of the digit. Pressing P/R, stores the new value.
• If only the parameters should be indicated (without change), press P/R directly (without performing the last two
points). If P/R is pressed again, you should reach the RUN mode.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
The following diagram shows the above-mentioned information.

PRESSING P/R, WITH A PARAMETER
1
BEING SELECTED, CHANGES
DISPLAY OF STORED DOWN CALLS

INTO RUN MODE.
PRESS P/R
2
SELECTION OF PARAMETERS
CHANGE TO PROGRAM MODE. PARAMETER 1 APPEARS
PRESS (<) REPEATEDLY UNTIL THE DESIRED

PARAMETER IS INDICATED
3
FOR EXAMPLE, CHANGE PARAMETER 2: No. OF LANDINGS
PRESSING (>) THE SELECTED PARAMETER IS DISPLAYED

4
OF THE PARAMETER TO BE MODIFIED
THE CURRENT VALUE OF PARAMETER 2 IS 10 FLOORS.

SELECTION OF THE DIGIT VALUE
THE LEFT-HAND DIGIT IS BLINKING.
PRESS (<) REPEATEDLY UNTIL THE DESIRED

PARAMETER BLINKS
5
AFTER PRESSING (<) 3 TIMES, THE FOURTH DIGIT

IS NOW BLINKING. THIS VALUE IS TO BE CHANGED
PRESS (>) REPEATEDLY UNTIL THE DESIRED VALUE

CAN BE SET
6
THE NEW PARAMETER VALUE
AFTER PRESSING (>) 3 TIMES, THE VALUE OF PARAMETER

CHANGING AND STORING
2 IS NOW 13 LANDINGS
BY PRESSING P/R, THE NEW VALUE OF THE

PARAMETER WILL BE STORED
7
FOR 1 SEC THE MESSAGE PO APPEARS ON THE DISPLAY.
THAT MEANS THAT THE NEW VALUE IS CORRECT AND IS
STORED IN THE CHANGER. IF THE NEW ENTERED VALUE IS
NOT PERMITTED, THE MESSAGE PF APPEARS ON THE
DISPLAY AND THE PREVIOUS VALUE IS INDICATED AGAIN.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.4.3.3. Parameters configuration table for MicroBASIC control unit with additional AMB2 board
To configurated this parameters see point 4.3.3.
4.4.3.4. Configuration of parameters on the AMB2 circuit board
PARAMETER No. VALUE DESCRIPTION
1 1-4 Number of lifts controlled by AMB2.
2 2 - 16 Total number of landings in the building.
3 0000 - FFFF Calls not served in downward motion lift 1 (in hexadecimal). (5)
7 0000 - FFFF Calls not served in upward motion lift 1 (in hexadecimal). (5)
11 00.00 - 23.59 Time of operation.
12 01.01 - 31.12 Date of operation.
Access code: Should the access to the PROGRAM mode be protected through a code, a
13 0000 NONE
value other than 0000 must be entered.
14 0000-1111 Communications control.
15 - 18 -3 Telephone number of the central control office.
19 - 21 -3 GSM telephone number for short messages (SMS). (1)
22 - 24 -3 Telephone number of the central message server (SMSC). (1)
25 - 27 -3 Own telephone number. (2)
28 0-1 0: Normal - 1: Redundant circuit board
(1) Enter international telephone number (without the dialling code).
(2) This number must be consistent with the number of the central control office in the data base.
(3) All telephone numbers must be entered with letter ‘E’ to designate end of telephone number.
(4) Meaning of digits of parameter 14:
TYPE OF MODEM
0 : conventional
1 : GSM
CALL TO CENTRAL CONTROL OFFICE

0 : Deactivated
1 : Activated
TYPE OF ERROR WHICH TRIGGERS A CALL OR SMS

0 : Only serious errors
1 : All errors
SHORT MESSAGES-SMS SERVICE (Message to a mobile phone GSM)

0 : Deactivated
1 : Activated

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
(5) Practical example of an asymmetric quadruplex control unit.
FLOORS LIFT 1 LIFT 2 LIFT 3 LIFT 4
6 X DOWN DOWN X ASYMMETRY

The asymmetry must be configured for
5 X UP/DOWN UP/DOWN DOWN each individual lift on the MicroBASIC
circuit board.
4 DOWN UP/DOWN UP/DOWN UP/DOWN
ABOUT THE CALLS
3 UP/DOWN UP/DOWN UP/DOWN UP/DOWN Up calls from the uppermost landing are
not accepted and down calls from the
2 UP/DOWN UP UP/DOWN UP lowest landing are not accepted.
1 UP X UP X
A. Lift 1 accepts no down calls from landings 5 and 6.

Parameter 3 / Display [0030]
Group 1
Group 4 Group 3 Group 2
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Landings
0 0 1 1
Calls which lift 1

does not accept
in descent (5and 6)
Display
Parameter 3
Binary-Hexadecimal Conversion
Binary Hexadecimal
0000 0
0001 1
0010 2
0011 3
0100 4
0101 5
0110 6
0111 7
1000 8
1001 9
1010 A
1011 B
1100 C
1101 D
1110 E
1111 F
B. Lift 1 does not accept calls from landings 4 and 5 in ascent.

Parameter 7 / Display [0018].
C. Lift 2 does not accept calls from landing 1 in ascent.

D. Lift 2 does not accept calls from landing 2 in descent.

E. Lift 4 does not accept calls from landings 2 and 6 in descent.

F. Lift 4 does not accept calls from landings 1 and 5 in ascent.

G. Parameters 5 (lift down travels 3) and 9 (lift up travels 3) are set to [0000].

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.4.4. Operation
4.4.4.1. Operation in normal configuration
Operation of the MicroBASIC + AMB2 assembly is identical to the simplex MicroBASIC control unit, but more features
are included, as indicated in chapter 1.
4.4.4.2. Redundant operation
The MicroBASIC control unit can operate redundantly with the installed AMB2 extension module, when two AMB2 circuit
boards are installed, instead of one (normal configuration). This redundant procedure should reduce the risks that can
arise when only one AMB2 controls the lift group. As a standard, MACPUARSA installs the redundant group safety
system for all triplex and quadruplex groups.
Basically, the operating mode is such that one of the two AMB2 circuit boards controls the lift group and the other
remains in the STAND-BY mode (indication on the display ‘STBY’).
The second circuit board constantly controls the correct operation of the first AMB2. Should it be determined that it is
no longer operating correctly with all the lifts of the group, the second one takes over the control of the entire group.
The time between the failure of the one and the take-over by the other circuit board should not exceed 20 seconds.
When the second circuit board, originally in STAND-BY mode, has taken over the control, it can no longer leave this
mode of operation independently. In order to reset this circuit board in the STAND-BY mode, change to the PROGRAM
mode and back again or briefly interrupt the electrical supply.
Notes about the redundant operating mode:
• Redundancy is always operated with two AMB2 circuit boards, for duplex, triplex or quadruplex groups. The
redundant control is always possible, even though for triplex and quadruplex groups it is recommended.
• The wiring for a redundant control unit (two AMB2 circuit boards) is identical with the wiring for only one AMB2.
The wires end in both printed circuit boards; that means, they operate parallel to one another, the wires must be
attached to the same points of each printed circuit board.
• Parametrization of both circuit boards must be identical with the exception of parameter [28], which defines which
one is the normally operating circuit board and which one remains in STAND-BY mode.
Information on the active redundant operation:
If the circuit board normally in STAND-BY mode should change to operating mode (after an error was determined in
the AMB2 which normally controls operations), a signal is activated which indicates this active redundant operation.
The output wiring (a) from the EXTENSION PACKAGE INPUTS/OUTPUTS of the redundant AMB2 circuit board
(STAND-BY) is activated when it takes over the control of the lift group. If between this point and 0Vdc a led-
indicator is connected (not a light bulb) and installed in the main floor of the building, then the users of the
equipment will be made aware of the special operation status.
During the regular inspections, the following maintenance work must be completed on the AMB2 redundant system:
< Check to see whether the circuit board is operating in normal operation mode and the redundant AMB2 circuit
board (STAND-BY) offers the information on the display. If the redundant circuit board is currently in operation
mode, investigate the cause for this (possible failure of the first AMB2).
• The correct operation of the redundant operation of the lifts must be checked. To do so, proceed as follows:
! During normal operation of the lifts, all 24Vdc incoming mains cables to the first AMB2 (the controlling circuit
board under normal conditions) should be removed.
! Within 20 seconds, the AMB2 changes from the STAND-BY mode to the operation mode and controls the lifts.
Check for several minutes, to see that this is the case.
! In order to set the first circuit board back into the general operation mode, connect the electrical supply again
completely. Be certain that all connections are connected again.
! After that, the second redundant AMB2 is switched to PROGRAM mode and switched off again, so that it
conclusively remains again in the STAND-BY mode.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
4.4.5. Control unit errors
When an error occurs on one lift, it is stored by the MicroBASIC as well as by the AMB2. The coding of the errors is the
same in both, however, the following information is stored additionally by the AMB2:
! number of lift.
! landing at which the error occurred.
! time.
! date.
The error codes displayed by the AMB2 circuit board are identical to those by the MicroBASIC (see point 4.1.5), with
the exception of certain special operation errors of AMB2:
• F50: Communication failure.

If the communication between the AMB2 and a MicroBASIC control unit definitely fails, this error message will be
indicated together with the number of the relevant control unit.
• F80: Parameter loss.

This occurs when it is determined that the configuration parameters of the AMB2 are incorrect. Consequently, the
error message [F80] appears (the information about the lift number is no longer relevant). Start over and enter
the correct values for the individual parameters.
When error F80 occurs, the AMB2 circuit board is self-configured to an operating situation so that lifts are not
stopped. They would continue operating, even though this situation would not be quite correct.
Should an error occur, the current indication on the display goes out and the error message appears, alternately
showing all relevant information.
Table of failures
LIST OF FAILURES [F x y]
XY CAUSE XY CAUSE
01* Maximum travel time. 17* Failures in configuration parameters (parametrization)
02* Lift out of travel or previous series open (previous to 18 Error in frequency inverter (in 3VF only)
door).
03* Lift parked after enabling final limit switch (hydraulic 19

lifts only).
04* Stuck contactor. 26* Lift at level and CPS off (hydraulic lift only)
5 Repeated errors in car door series. 27* No CPS switching at floor level (hydraulic lift only)
6 Door series open, during a service. 60 Functionality calls filtering EN81-28- inhibited
7 Landing locks series open during a service 61 Functionality OMROM variator- inhibited
8 Miscorrection for pulse reading 62 Functionality STOP- inhibited
09* Control unit fuse (FM) or power supply fuse (FF) 63 Functionality permanent service out light - inhibited
blown.
10* Failure in the MicroBASIC board. 64 Functionality permanent service out latch- inhibited
11 Door series open. Max. time exceeded. 65 Functionality 3C short floor- inhibited
12 Open door pushbutton, photocell and door sensitivity. 66 Functionality automatic door and electric cam-
Max. time exceeded. inhibited
13 Lift at intermediate floor with a terminal stopping 67 Functionality attendand mode- inhibited
switch open
14* Both terminal stopping switches open 68 Functionality U36 norm- inhibited
15* Upper terminal stopping switch goes from closed to 69 Functionality australia firefighter- inhibited
open in descent
16* Lower terminal stopping switch goes from closed to

open in ascent

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
* Errors considered to be serious: the control unit prevents lift from moving, thus becoming out of service. Control unit
generates the corresponding error (Fxy), which will be shown in the MicroBASIC PCB displays and will be stored for
future viewing. The car display (and/or landing display, if any) will show indications of the 1st and 2nd level in a
flickering way (configurable by means of the parameters 26).
Switching the inspection switch cancels out-of-service state.
Table with possible causes which prevent run of lift
CAUSES PREVENTING RUN OF LIFT [A or x]
OX ELEMENT
01 Series fuses blown.
02 Final limit switch open or series previous to doors.
03 Overtemperature .
04 Overload.
05 Complete.
06 Door series open.
07 Pushbuttons open (PAP, SEN, CEL).
08 Car and landing locks series open.
09 Car or landing call from the floor where the lift is on.
Table of states of the lift elements
LIST OF STATES [E x y]
XY STATE (DIGIT DOES NOT FLICKER) XY STATE DIGIT DOES NOT FLICKER
01 Overload on. 15 Fire-brigade key switch in car, on.
02 Complete on. 16 Levelling direction in descent.
03 Car and landing locks series closed. 17 Fire-brigade key switch in shaft, on.
04 Safety area on, leveller. 18 Contactor KCS or KCR on.
05 Safety series locked (SAF, SAC, STOP, SFS, SFI, 19 Contactor KCB or KCL on.
SLV)
06 Not used. 20 FM series fuse correct.
07 Leveller closed. 21 Terminal 20 of P3 on (parameter 11).
08 Not used. 22 Return in process.
09 Lower terminal stopping switch closed. 23 Transient out of service.
10 Upper terminal stopping switch closed. 24 Permanent out of service.
11 Inspection control unit on. 25 In operation.
12 Landing presence-of-leaf contact closed. 26 Slow speed.
13 Door opening series closed (PAP, CEL,SEN) 27 End of service.
14 STOP series open (movable sill, STOP button)

More detailed information about the electrical installation, including the circuit diagrams for each of its parts, is detailed
MTIPIEPMB302GB
below. The meanings of the abbreviations used in these diagrams are included in the respective appendix.
32 1 0Vdc PIN 103

31 2 +24
30
29 3 TS A1
28 4 KSG A
27
26 5 +24' A2
25
24
BYT11-1000
A2
23 20Vs
0Vs 0Vp
+24Vdc 22 +24 60Vs 220Vp KRLE
ST 20Vs
TRM
L+ 21 Vcc
110Vs
20 In caseA1 60Vs
220Vp
0
0Vdc 19 0Vcc 0Vs 0Vp
of cam 48Vs B
L- 18 Signal Us 80Vs
17 61(21) 61(21) 380Vp
voltage 98 97 A1 A2
110Vs
KCM KCB 14
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
input
MicroBASIC
k
j
62(22) 62(22)
GRF KRFF
i 11
+
62(22) ~2
h
g KCS - ~1
f 61(21) 2
e A1 A1
Page 120
A1
d KCS KCM 48Vs QIM
KCB
A
A
A
c 13 0Vs 60Vs 6A
1
b A2
A2 A2
L2 L2 110Vs
a KCM
KCS KCB 0Vp 220Vp
14
T2 T2
R
16
15 S
T KRFF
14
13
12
11
CHAPTER 5. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
10 C L1 L3 L1 L3
9
RVAR KCB
8 KCS
7 36V
T1 T3 T1 T3
6 2 1
5
4
3
2
1
5.1. Machine room installation
L1 L2 L3
KSG
KCM
14 11 T1 T2 T3
GRL
91 107216 0Vp 0Vs ~1
- LE ( - )
48Vs 11 (21) 14 (24) + LE ( + )
~2
220Vp 60Vs KRLE
206
204
TS1
220
TS2
CCS R S T U V W t SM
0
110Vs D
5.1.1.1. One speed

In case
V3.02, NOV.05
5.1.1. Controller
of cam
MTIPIEPMB302GB
Signal
voltage
20Vs
input 220
+24Vcc 60Vs
Vp
110Vs
32
31 0Vcc 0Vs 0Vp In case
30 of cam
29
28
BYT11-1000
A1
27
26 RVAR KRLE 0Vs
25 36V TRM 0Vp
24
A2 20Vs
1 2
23 60Vs
220Vp
+24Vdc 22 48Vs
L+ 21 61(21) 61(21)
A
A2
20 TS ST KCR KCB 80Vs 380Vp
KSG
A
0
0Vdc 19
+24'
0Vdc
110Vs
+24
62(22) 62(22)
L- 18 1 2 3 4 5 BST Us
A1
62(22) 62(22)
17
98 97 A1 A2
KCL KCS
PIN 103
61(21) 61(21)
~2 ~1
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
k 48Vs
j 0Vs 60Vs
110Vs
h
i GRF 14
0Vp 220Vp
MicroBASIC
g KRFF
+ - 11
Page 121
f
e A 2
d
QIM
c 6A 1
b A1 A1 A1 A1 R
a KCB KCS A KCR A KCL A 13 L2 S
13 L2
KRFF
A
A
T
A2 A2 A2 A2 KCR KCL KCB KCS
14 14 T2 T2
16
15
14
L1 L3 L1 L3
13
12 KCB KCS
11 T1 T3 T1 T3
10 C
9
8
7
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
6
5 KCR KCL
4 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
3
2
1 KSG
5.1.1.2. Two speeds
14 11
V3.02, NOV.05
91 107 216 0Vp 0Vs ~1 LE ( - )
204
206
220
TS1
TS2
LE-
-
R S T U V W U1 V1 W1 t
0
48Vs 11(21) 14(24) LE ( + )
~2 LE+
+
In case 220Vp 60Vs KRLE
CCS of cam 110Vs GRL
D
MTIPIEPMB302GB
A1 PIN 103
KRREV 0Vdc CE +
1 2 3 4 5
32 A1
31 A2
24Vdc CE -
KSG 0 Vdc
A
30
29 Signal TS KRL3
BYT11 - 1000
A2
28 37
27 voltage 208 7
20Vs
26
input In case KRFR
MK2P
36
25 24 Vdc + 24 Vdc
24 of cam 61 (21) 11 BTST 2 COND
23 K1 KRNS 0 0Vs 0Vp
+24Vdc 22 20Vs TRM
BYT11-1000
L+ 21
+24Vcc 60Vs 220Vp
A2 62 (22) 14 20Vs 19
20 Us 60Vs
110Vs KRLE 61 (21) 220Vp
0Vdc 19 14 11 A1 A2 B 18
48Vs
L- 18 0Vcc 0Vs 0Vp A1 K2
3VFMAC1 - 10 y 15 (400Vac)
17 80Vs 380Vp 8
62 (22)
110Vs KRSE 17
MicroBASIC
2
k KRFR 12 KRREV
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
8(31) 6(34)
j QIM 11 12 16
i 1(11) 3(14) 6A
1 KRNS
h
g KRFR 15
SERIE F
21 24
1
2
f 48Vs
e 0Vs 60Vs
d
A1 A1 A1 A1
KRET 14
K1 K2 KRSE KRNS 110Vs
A
A
c
A
Page 122
b 0Vp 220Vp
a 35 34 A2 A2 A2 A2
GRF C MBAS A 13
+
-
3VFMAC1 K2 K1
de 11 12
53 54 54 53
16 13 13 L1 L2 L3
15 11
14 K1 K2 de 12
14 14
K1
13
12 T1 T2 T3 U
11 V
10 C W
9 L1 L2 L3
8 KRSE RVAR C1
K2
7 5 9 36V C2
6 1 T1 T2 T3 R
2
5
4 S
3 T
B2 B1
2 B1
1 KSG B2
14 11 M 1
C1+ 2
+24Vdc
+5Vdc
+24Vdc FAL C1- 3 C6
GRL
0Vp 0Vs 4
TS1
TS2
C2+
206
220
1
204
-
LE-
R S T t U V W
0
91 107 216
In case 48Vs 11 14
2
+
LE+ C2- 5
220Vp 60Vs
of cam KRLE
5.1.1.3. Speed variation
110Vs
CCS + - C1+ C1- C2+ C2-
CENC
V3.02, NOV.05
MTIPIEPMB302GB
MAC-538
E k FV 103 00 207 +24 GND FS FB FZS
12 11
BP KRL FZS
32 12V 1.2A/h 1K5
FS
- BYT11-1000
FB
31 + A2
E
30 KRL
QIB
29 A1 00-CC2
28
27 PIN 207 PIN 103

26
25
24 A1
23 20Vs Signal
+24Vdc 22 +24V 60Vs
220 0Vs KSG A
L+ 21 110Vs
Vp voltage 0Vp TRV 20Vs 0Vs A2
20
0Vdc 0Vs 0Vp input
20Vs
TRM 0Vp
0Vdc 19 48 Vs
L- 18 48Vs B
1
220Vp
17 60Vs 60Vs
110Vp
RVAR
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
220Vs 80Vs
2 In case 110Vs
380Vp
BYT11-1000
of cam A1
k
j KRLE
i A2
Page 123
h 14
g
f
A2 A2 KRFF
e KVR KVD TS ST
MicroBASIC
11
d 0Vs
c
A1 A1
0 + ~1 TRM 0Vs
0Vdc
+24'
+24
b 2
53(13)
a
A1 A1 1 2 3 4 5 Us - ~2 48Vs 60Vs
A KCG A KCM KCM 98 97 A1 A2
A2 A2
GRV 1
QIM
16 54(14) TRV 6A
15
KCM
14 11 12 KRFF
13
12 KVD 61(21) 62(22)
11
KCG KVR R S T
10 61(21) 62(22) 11 12
9 L1 L2 L3
5.1.1.4. Hydraulic. Direct starting
8 KCG
7
6 T1 T2 T3
5
L1 L2 L3
4
3 KCM
2 T1
14 11 T2 T3
1
KSG
281
280
240
206
205
204
220
TS1
TS2
R S T U V W t SM
0
0Vp 0Vs 1
- LE ( - )
KRLE LE-
48Vs
V3.02, NOV.05
In case 220 11 14 LE ( + )
LE+
2
+
91 107 216 60Vs
Vp 21 24
of cam 110Vs
GRL D
BY255
CCS FV
MTIPIEPMB302GB
MAC-538
E k FV 103 00 207 +24 GND FS FB FZS
FZS
FS
FB
E
QIB
6A 0Vp TRV 0Vs GRL In case
00-CC2 PIN 207
12
20Vs 11
2 1
0Vp 0Vs 1 - LE-
BP 48Vs of cam VN 1K5 KRL
+ 48Vs LE+
220 11 14
2
+ 32
32 12V 60Vs 21 24 12Vdc
60 Vs Vp 110Vs A1
PIN 103
KRLE
31
30
- 1.2A/h 110Vp
220Vs
KSG
BYT11-1000
29 A2 A2
28 D KRL
27 0Vs
Signal 0Vp A1
26 20Vs
+24 60Vs 220 20Vs TRM
25 Vcc Vp voltage 48Vs
24 110Vs 220Vp B
BYT11-1000
input A1
60Vs PIN 207
23 0Vcc 0Vs 0Vp
+24Vdc 22 KRLE 80Vs
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
L+ 21 A2 110Vs
20 380Vp
0Vdc 19 In case
ST
L- 18 TS of cam
0
17
0Vdc
+24'
+24
BST Us
98 97 A1 A2 14
k 1 2 3 4 5
KRFF
Page 124
TRM TRV
MicroBASIC
j
i GRV 11
h KCE 0Vs 0Vs
1
+
2
g
71 72 QIM
f
e
-
2 48Vs 60Vs 1 6A
d A1 A1 A1
c KCM KCT KCE KCE KCM KVD R
A
A
A
b A2 A2 A2 S
a 61(21) 62(22) 62(22) 61(21) 12 11
KRFF
KVR KCT T
16 12 11 62(22) 61(21)
15
14
13
5.1.1.5. Hydraulic. Star-delta starting
A2 A2
12
11 KVR KVD 53(13)
10 A1 A1 KCE * L1 L2 L3
9 54(14)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
8 KCM KCT KCE
7 T1 T2 T3
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
6
5
4
3
2
1 KSG
RVAR
280
240
281
206
205
204
220
TS1
TS2
14 11 36V
R S T U V W X Y Z t
V3.02, NOV.05
2 1
91 107 216
FV
CCS BY255
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.1.2. Machine room terminals. Filters
< Electric 1 speed
TS1 TS2 206 204 0 220 R S T U V W
Protection box
1
RTE - M
Mains 3
2
+ supply
< Electric 2 speeds
TS1 TS2 206 204 0 220 R S T U V W U1 V1 W1
High speed winding
Protection
M
1 box 3~
RTE -
2 Mains
+
supply
Slow speed winding
< Electric. Frequency variation
+ - C1+ C1- C2+C2-
TS1 TS2 206 204 0 220 R S T U V W

CENC
In case Protection
1 box
of industrial
encoder RTE - M
3
2 Mains
+
supply

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
< Hydraulic. Direct starting
TS1 TS2 281 280 240 206 205 204 0 220 R S T U V W
220Vac
SO
YE YT
STS Protection
YR box
YD M
3
RTE Mains
supply
< Hydraulic. Star-delta starting
TS1 TS2 281 280 240 206 205 204 0 220 R S T U V W X Y Z
220Vac
SO
YE YT
Protection
STS
YR box
M
YD 3
RTE Mains
supply
SO
PTC Overpressure contact
STS
Brake Oil temperature contact
Fan Electrovalve
YE: Emergency valve (280,281)

YD:Descent valve (204, 205)
YR: Fast speed or change speed valve (204, 206)
YS:Star-delta starting valve and/or soft starter and/or door lock

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
< Filters
For the control unit to function properly, filters must be placed on some components:
GREEN/YELLOW
BLACK
BLACK
0Vs
BLACK
BLACK
0Vp
AZUL
20Vs A1
A
S-RFF
T-RFF
60Vs
L1-CG/CM
R-RFF
L2-CG/CM
L3-CG/CM
220Vp
B 48Vs
A2
80Vs BLACK
AZUL
110Vs
380Vp R S T
PRIMARY TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR COIL
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNITS
FILTER CONNECTION FILTER CONNECTION
MAINS FILTER CONNECTION
COLOUR = X
BLUE ORANGE ORANGE
BLUE BLUE
C D FV
D
B B B
GREEN
BLACK
BLUE
PINK
RED
RED
RED RED
206
204
281
206
205
204
LE+
295
240
LE-
205
204
U V W
THREE-PHASE OPERATOR BRAKE FILTER CAM FILTER CAM FILTER VALVE FILTER
FILTER CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION
TYPE C - BRAKE FILTER TYPE A - CONTACTOR FILTER

BLACK BLACK
- + 220 Ohm 220 Kp
2W UF5408 2W 400 V
GREEN - 470 ohm 220V - RED
X- PINK - 220 ohm 110V - RED
YELLOW - 100 ohm 60V - RED
X - DEPENDS ON BRAKE VOLTAGE

TYPE B - TRANSFORMER AND
3-PHASE OPERATOR FILTER
BLUE BLUE
220 Ohmios 100 Kp
GREEN
BLACK
2W 400 V
BLUE
PINK
RED
FV
TYPE D - CAM FILTER
UF5408
(-) ORANGE (+) RED

VALVE FILTER UF5408

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.1.3. PCB MicroBASIC terminals
• Group CC1: car calls
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 24 A B C D
< 109: common for car buttons (+24)

< 111-120: car calls and call register buttons
< +24: +24Vcc display power requirements, magnetic switches, inspection controls...
< A, B, C, D: binary display signals (+24)
• Group CH1: landing calls (shaft)
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 24 A B C D
< 110: common for landing buttons (+24)

< 111-120: landing calls and call register buttons
< +24: +24Vcc display power requirements, magnetic switches, inspection controls...
< A, B, C, D: binary display signals (+24)
• Group CC2: car connections
2 0Vdc 0 203 106 207 105 217 +12F 208 102 9 220 t 103 218
< 0Vdc: common for lighted call register buttons, calls, magnetic switch power, display.
< 2: serial photoelectric cell, sensitivity, open door button (+24, N.C.)
< 208: inspection operation switch (+24, N.O.)
< 203: pulse contact (+24, MAC 324/325, N.O.)
< 207: leveller contact (0Vdc, MAC 325, N.O. on floor)
< 105/106: car locks series (N.C.)
< 220/102: car safety (N.C.), slack-rope, safety gear, stop button.
< 9: fire-brigade key switch in car (+24, N.O.)
< t: earth
< 217: up indicator light (0Vdc)
< 218: down indicator light (0Vdc)
< 103/00: safety circuit for bridging series (SP, SCE, SCC) and allowing movement with doors open.
• Group CH2: shaft connections
213 217 218 215 294 214 105 0Vdc 104 226 220 228 10 t 103 5
< 213: common for signalling lights (signal voltage negative)

< 217: up indicator light (signal voltage positive)
< 218: down indicator light (signal voltage positive)
< 215: occupied indicator light (signal voltage positive)
< 294: available indicator light (signal voltage positive)
< 214: door open indicator light (signal voltage positive)
< 104/105: outside locks series (N.C.)
< 220/103: final limit switch series, speed governor tension pulley contact, hatch contact, pit stop (N.C.)
< 226: lower terminal stopping switch (0Vdc, N.C.)
< 228: upper terminal stopping switch (0Vdc, N.C)
< 10: landing fire-brigade key switch (+24, N.O.)
< t: earth
< 103/104: door series (presence detector contact) (N.C.)
< 5: emergency stop contact (N.C.)

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Group CC3: car connections
0Vp 223 222 221
< 0Vp/221: power 220Vac (photocell, operator, etc)

< 222/221: close door signal (220Vac).
< 223/221: open door signal (220Vac).
• Group P1:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
< 1: supply voltage input for operator (220Vp)

< 2: supply voltage input for operator (0Vp)
< 3: stuck contactor input (24Vdc)
< 4: stuck contactor input (24Vdc)
< 5: earthed PCB
< 6: free
< 7: descent signal (output 0Vs)
< 8: safety series reading (110Vs)
< 9: ascent signal (output 0Vs)
< 10: supply voltage input for operation (20Vs)
< 11: fast speed signal (output 0Vs)
< 12: safety series reading (110Vs)
< 13: slow speed signal (output 0Vs)
< 14: input 0Vs
< 15: input 110Vs
< 16: occupied light (24Vdc)
• Group P2:
a b c d e f g h i j k
< a: contactors control signal (output 0Vs, only hydraulic, KCG for direct-starting, KCM for star-delta
starting)
< b: overload input signal (24Vdc)
< c: contactors control signal (output 0Vs, only hydraulic, KCM for direct-starting, KCT for star-delta
starting)
< d: complete input signal (with no 24Vdc)
< e: star-delta change signal (output 0Vs, only hydraulic star-delta starting)
< f: overload output signal (0Vdc)*
< g: complete output signal (0Vdc)*
< h, i, k: * (output 0Vdc)
< j: overtemperature input signal (24Vdc)
• Group P3:
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
< 17: free

< 18: signalling voltage input (0Vdc)
< 19: output 0Vdc
< 20: * (24Vdc)
< 21: signalling voltage input (24Vdc)

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
< 22: output 24Vdc

< 23: in hydraulic, valves voltage input (48, 60, 110Vdc)
< 24, 25, 26: see diagrams point 1.6
< 27: safety series final input (110Vs)
< 28: in hydraulic, valves voltage input (0Vdc), in electrical, free
< 29: valve common (output 0Vdc)
< 30: emergency valve supply (+12Vdc)
< 31: output 0Vdc
< 32: output 12Vdc
* Auxiliary and programmable inputs and outputs (see point 5.5.6)
5.2. Car installation
5.2.1. Car control station
CB_x
PCP
3' 3' 24Vdc Door open pushbutton
CB_x FSC
FSC FSC 24Vdc Out of service (special software)
CB_x
With intercom set
INT INT
INT INT SAL
CBTF
P25 P24
TFN TFN
TLF FONOMAC
TFN TFN
U37
CB
LED+ LED+ LED+
L+ L+ L+
Luminaire PLB
C- C- C-
SAL
AL1 AL1
AL2 AL2 PAP
PAP2 PAP2
0Vdc 0Vdc
111 111 Connect to
11x 11x
second
t t
217 217
car call
218 218
+24 +24
9BB' 9BB'
BB
2C 2C
SPC1
HRL1
SPC2
CB1 HRL2
SPC3
109 109 HRL3
111 111 SPC4
HRL4
112 112
SPC5
113 113 HRL5
114 114 SPC6

HRL6
115 115 SPC7
116 116 HRL7
SPC8
117 117 HRL8
118 118 SPC9
HRL9
119 119
SPC10
120 120 HRL10
+24 +24
A A
B B
C C
D D
CBS
A B C D (- +) (- +) - +
91 91 Overload acoustic
107 107 and light signal 0Vcc Car display
216 216
+24
91
107 To load weighing device*
* Variations according to the type of loadweighing device. See point 5.4.4. “Loadweighing”

MTIPIEPMB302GB
Presence detector contact
Door series contact
From
photocell
0V +24 NO COM NC
CR2 H16 - CB
H13 M13
0V +24 OUT LED+

2 2 222 REV L+
OVdc OVdc C-
203 203 AL1 To car
106 106 AL2
control
207 207 PAP2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OVdc
station
105 105
217 217 B/111
208 208 S/11X
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
OV +24OUT t
102 102
9 9 217
220 220 218
t t +24
Page 131
218 218 9/BB'
2C
-
H2 CAR
M2
SIR (B) SPRB
211 211
212 212 STOP H4 - CF To magnetic switch
STRS
+24 (it depends on the
CR3 203 installation)
H4 M4 0Vdc
0Vp 0Vp 207
223 223
222 222
221 221 TC t
Car lighting
STOP
CRTF SIR (A)
H2 M2
SPRB Slack-rope contact
TFN TFN
TFN TFN
5.2.2. Inspection box
SPRS Safety gear contact

H2 M2 To operator
V3.02, NOV.05
TFN LE+ WARNING : New inspection selector (2 positions : ON1, ON2 )
TFN LE- (A): Normally Closed Contact
- Position 1. Non-activated : Closed
To cam
- Position 2. Activated : Open
(B): Normally Closed Contact
- Position 1. Activated : Open
- Position 2. Non-activated : Closed
TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.2.3. Magnetic switches
5.2.3.1. Orange box magnetics
ELECTRIC 1S ELECTRIC 2S AND 3VF HYDRAULIC WITHOUT RELEVELLING
324 325 326
0Vdc
+24 203 0Vdc 207 +24 203 0Vdc 207
+24 203
+24 203 0Vdc207 +24203 0Vdc207

+24203 0Vdc
207 From inspection box 207 From insp. box

0Vdc 0Vdc
0Vdc From inspection box
203 203
203
+24 +24
+24
HYDRAULIC WITH RELEVELLING AND ELECTRIC WITH PRE-OPENING
328 327
0Vdc XE
+24 203 0Vdc XFZS
+24
XFS 0Vdc XFB
+24XFS 0VdcXFB 0VdcXE +24203 0VdcXFZS
XFZS
From inspection box
0Vdc
XE 203
0Vdc +24
From inspection box
XFB
0Vdc
XFS
+24

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.2.3.2. Commercial magnetics
ELECTRIC 2S AND 3VF HYDRAULIC WITH RELEVELLING

ELECTRIC 1S
324 325 marrón 327 marrón

NO NC azul NO azul
marrón marrón
0V 207 azul 0V FZS azul
+24 203
marrón
NO NO
azul
+24 203 +24 203
+24 203 0V +24 203 0V 207 +24 203 0VFZS
324 325 327
+24203 0Vdc FZS

+24 203 0Vdc +24 203 0Vdc 207
From inspection box From inspection box From inspection box 207
0Vdc 207 0Vdc
203 0Vdc 203
+24 203 +24
+24
HYDRAULIC WITH RELEVELLING ELECTRIC WHIT APPROXIMATION
328 328
marrón
marrón NO azul
NO azul
0V FB
0V FB
marrón
marrón NO azul
marrón
NO + NC azul 0V FS
azul
0V FS 0V E
E 0V +24 FS 0V FB +24 FS 0V FB
328-2 328-1 328-1
0Vdc XE +24XFS 0Vdc XFB +24203 0Vdc XFZS
XFB From inspection box

0Vdc From inspection box
XFS XFZS
+24 0Vdc
203
+24
XE
0Vdc
Note: it will be placed 327 and 328-hydraulic whit relevelling magnetics on hydraulic with relevelling case. It will be
placed 327 and 328-electric with approximation magnetics on electric whit approximation case.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.2.4. Operators
5.2.4.1. Single-phase supply + cam signals
• Simple landing
- PUARSA
Inspection PUARSA
MicroBASIC board box operator
1
0Vp 223 222 221
2
CC3 CR3 CR3 222 Red 3
0Vp 0Vp Black
4
223 223 Green
PAP2
CC3 222 222 Green
5
221 221 2 6
0Vp223 222 221 0Vp Orange
7
221 Black 8
9
Brown
105 10
11
Brown
106 12
Travelling
cable M~
From inspection box
- REVECO II
REVECO II
Inspection box operator
MicroBASIC board C4 C4
C3 C3
0Vp 223 222 221
C2 C2
CC3 CR3 CR3 222 Red C1 C1
0Vp 0Vp t t t
223 223 0Vp Yellow/green
CC3 222 222 V2 V2
221 221
221 Orange
V1 V1 M~
0Vp 223 222221 2 Black
OBX OBX
PAP2 Green
OB2 OB2
Green
105
105
XPC
Brown 106
106
Brown
Travelling
cable

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Double landing
- PUARSA
MICROBASIC
board
0Vp 223 222 221
CC3
CC3 PUARSA
0Vp 223 222 221 operator 1
na
Inspection box
n
r
1
2
r
222 3
n
CR3 4
CR3 PAP2 v
v
5 M1
6
~
na 2
0Vp 0Vp na 7
0Vp
az 223 223 n 8
r
222 222
221
9
n 221 221 105 m
10
11
106 m
12
From double
1
landing box CDE-1 CDE-1 2
r
222 2 222 2
r
n
3
r 222
222 222 4
0Vdc 0Vdc b PAP2 v
v
5 M2
b/az
+24 +24 6
~
2
na na
0Vp 0Vp 0Vp n
7
222 1 222 1
r 221
8
9
105 m 10
11
m
106 12
PUARSA
operator 2
- REVECO II
MICROBASIC
board
0Vp 223 222 221
CC3
REVECO II
operator 1
CC3
Inspection box C4 C4
0Vp 223 222221
C3 C3
C2 C2
222 C1 C1
t t t
0Vp
CR3 CR3
V2 V2
221 V1 V1 M1~
2 OBX
0Vp 0Vp OBX
223 223
PAP2 OB2 OB2
222 222
221 221 105 105
XPC
106
106
C4 C4
C3 C3
CDE-1 CDE-1 C2 C2
222
2222 2222
C1 C1
222 222 t t t
0Vdc 0Vdc 0Vp
V2 V2
+24 +24 221
V1 V1 M2~
0Vp 0Vp 2 OBX
2221 2221
OBX
PAP2 OB2 OB2
105 105
XPC
From double 106

106
landing box
REVECO II
operator 2

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.2.4.2. Single-phase
• Simple landing
MicroBASIC board
0Vp 223 222 221

CC3
CC3
0Vp 223 222 221
Inspection
box Door
CR3 CR3 FCAP operator
0Vp 0Vp Blue

Travelling 223 223 FCCP
Red
cable
222 222 M~
221 221 Black
• Double landing
MicroBASIC board
0Vp 223 222 221

CC3
CC3
0Vp 223 222 221
Door
Inspection box FCAP operator 1
Blue
FCCP
Travelling
0Vp 0Vp Red M1
223 223
cable 222 222 Black
~
221 221
CR3 CR3 Door
FCAP operator 2
Blue
FCCP
CDE-1 CDE-1
Red M2
2221 222 1
Black
~
2231 223 1
222 222
0Vp 0Vp
+24 +24
0Vdc 0Vdc
221 221
223 223
2232 223 2
2222 222 2
From double
landing box

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.2.4.3. Direct current
• Simple landing
Controller MicroBASIC board
0Vp 223 222 221

CC3
12Vs
0Vs 20Vs
48Vs
0Vp 223 222 221
~2 ~1
22 22 - +
KCCP KCAP
21 21
A1 A1 L1 L2 L1 L2
KCAP KCCP
A2 A2 KCAP KCCP
T1 T2 T1 T2
0Vp 233 234237 U1 V1 W1
CDE-1
CDE-1
0Vp 233 234237 U1 V1 W1 Inspection box
Orange
Red FCCP1
Orange
220~
0Vp 0Vp Orange
233 233
234 234 FCAP1
Travelling Grey
237 237
cable U1 U1
V1 V1 Black
W1 W1
Red M
CR3' CR3'
Door
operator

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Double landing
Controller
12Vs 12Vs
MicroBASIC board 0Vs 20Vs 0Vs 20Vs
48Vs 48Vs
0Vp 223 222 221
CC3
~2 ~1 ~2 ~1
CC3
0Vp 223 222 221 - + - +
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
KCAP2 KCCP2 KCAP1 KCCP1
T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2 T1 T2
21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22
A2 A2 A2 A2
KCCP2 KCAP2 KCCP1 KCAP1
A1 A1 A1 A1
231 235 U2 V2 W2 0Vp 233 234 237 U1 V1 W1
CR3'
CR3'
231 235 U2 V2 W2 0Vp 233 234 237 U1 V1 W1
Inspection box FCCP2
Orange
FCAP2
Grey
CR3' CR3' Orange
231 231
235 235
U2 U2 Orange
V2 V2
W2 Door
Travelling W2 M2
0Vp 0Vp 0Vac Red operator 2
cable 233 233
234 234 220Vac
237 237 FCCP1
U1 U1 Orange
V1 V1 FCAP1
W1 W1 Grey
Orange
Grey
From double
CDE-1 CDE-1 Black
landing box
Door
235' 235' M1
0Vdc 0Vdc Red operator 1
+24 +24
234 234
237' 237'

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.2.4.4. Three-phase
• Simple landing
MicroBASIC board
Controller
R S T
0Vp 223 222 221

CC3
0Vp 223222 221
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
22 22 96 KCAP KCCP
KCCP KCAP T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
21 21 95
RTP
A1 A1
KCAP KCCP
A2 A2
RTP
0Vp 233 234237 U1 V1 W1
CC3'
CC3'
0Vp 233 234237 U1 V1 W1
Inspection box
Orange
FCCP1
Orange
220~
0Vp 0Vp Orange Orange
233 233
234 234 FCAP1
Travelling Grey
237 237
cable U1 U1
V1 V1 Black
W1 W1
Red Door
M~
CR3' CR3' operator
Blue

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Double landing
Controller R S T
MicroBASIC board
0Vp 223 222 221 RTP

CC3
0Vp 223 222 221
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
22 22 96 22 22 KCAP1 KCCP1 KCCP2 KCCP2
KCCP2 KCAP2 RTP KCCP1 KCAP1 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
21 21 95 21 21
A1 A1 A1 A1
A2 A2 A2 A2
231 235 U2 V2 W2 0Vp 233 234 237 U1 V1 W1
CR3'
CR3'
231 235 U2 V2 W2 0Vp 233 234 237 U1 V1 W1

Inspection box
FCCP2
Orange
FCAP2
Grey
Orange
231 231
235 235 Grey
U2 U2
V2 V2
W2 W2 Black
Travelling 0Vp 0Vp 0Vac Red Door
233 233 M2
cable 234 234 220Vac Blue ~ operator 2
237 237
U1 U1
V1 V1 FCCP1
W1 W1 Orange
FCAP1
CR3' CR3' Grey
Orange
Grey
Black
Blue Door
M1
Red ~ operator 1
235' 235'
From double 0Vdc 0Vdc
+24 +24
landing box 234 234
237' 237'
CDE-1 CDE-1

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.2.5. Photocells
Photocells are devices generally located at door frame, which detect the presence of persons or objects and make car
doors open in case they are closing. A contact energized by the elements is inserted in 2-PAP series of door re-opening.
5.2.5.1. Static photocell. NPN type with NO output
A. Static (standard) photocell connection. Single landing.

Out signal is 0Vdc when the energizes an internal relay of the emergency board, whose NC contact is located in 2-PAP2
SMT 3000 C S 5Y Brown
RECEPTOR (SMR-3106)
Black BROWN: +24V
BLUE: 0V
BLACK: OUT
Blue
SMR30XX Brown
Black TRANSMITTER (SMT-3000)

BROWN: +24V
BLUE: 0V
BLACK: 0V
Blue
NPN NC / NO
series.
0Vdc +24Vdc 2 PAP2 Under tube

Green Green Operator
Green sensitivity
0V +24 NO COM NC
0 V +24 OUT
222REV XF1
0V +24 OUT
Black
Brown Receiver
OUT Blue
+24
0V
Brown
Blue Emitter
+24 Yellow
0V

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
B. Static (standard) photocell connection. Double landing.
0Vdc +24Vdc
0V +24 NO COM NC
0 V +24 OUT
222REV XF1
0V +24 OUT
Violet OUT2 Violet

Black OUT2
OUT OUT Black Double landing
OUT1 OUT1 Pink box DE_-_
Under tube
Pink
PAP2
Green Operator 1
Green
sensitivity
XF1
Photocell 1
OUT OUT OUT
+24 +24 +24 Receiver
0V 0V
0V
+24
0V Emitter
Under tube
XF2
Photocell 2
OUT OUT OUT
Red +24 +24
+24 Receiver
White 0V 0V
0V
+24
0V
Emitter
2 - CR2 Green Operator 2

Green
sensitivity
Inspection box
5.2.5.2. Standard photocell connection (voltage-free contact)

In this case, this photocell provides a voltage-free contact, which is directly located in 2-PAP2 series.
A. Single landing
Under tube
PAP2 Green
2 Green Green
Photocell
CEL
+24 White/blue
+24 +24 +24Vdc
CEL CEL
0Vdc White CEL CEL
0Vdc 0Vdc 0Vdc

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
B. Double landing-
5.2.6. Double landing
PAP2 Photocell 1
Green
PAP2' Green Green

+24 +24
CEL CEL
0Vdc CEL CEL
PAP2' Green
2 Green Green
Photocell 2
+24 White/blue
+24 +24 +24Vdc
CEL CEL
0Vdc White CEL CEL
0Vdc 0Vdc 0Vdc
When it is a double-landing installation, it is necessary to include a so-called double-landing box on the car roof. This
box has connections with the inspection box and a magnetic switch, which informs of which operator must be energized
at each floor.
There are different double landing boxes according to the type of photocell, operator and depending whether or not
entrances coincide.
Quick selection of the double landing box can be made with the aid of this table:
PHOTOCELL
OPERATOR VOLTAGE-FREE CONTACT OUTPUT STATIC OUTPUT
SINGLE-PHASE POWER SUPPLY OR + CAM

DEL - 1 DEL - 2 DEL - 3 DEL - 4 DEL - 5 DEL - 6
SIGNAL
THREE-PHASE DET - 1 DET - 2 DET - 3 DET - 4 DET - 5 DET - 6
SINGLE-PHASE OR DIRECT CURRENT DEM - 1 DEM - 2 DEM - 3 DEM - 4 DEM - 5 DEM - 6
See point 2.3.9. “Installing and connecting double landing box”.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
A. Single-phase or direct current operator connections with cam signal. Type DEL-1 or DEL-4 box.
M - 5 ( CDE - 1 ) Signal Photocell enabled
237'
234
1
+24
0Vdc A 2
235'
To inspection box
22 21 24 14 11 12
M-4 (CDE-2)
DET1 RDE RDE
31-PDE 01
PDE - 01
No statics PAP2
34,41-PDE 01 G2R-2C G2R-2C
PAP2' RDE RCEL
photocell 42-PDE 01 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
2 A
RCEL
RCEL
A
M-4 (CDE-2)
DET4
31 34 41 42 A 0 Vdc OP 1 OP 2
Statics
OUT2
photocell
OUT
OUT1 Operator 1 operates on some floors.
Operator 2 operates on the remaining floors.
They do not coincide on any floor.
Place the screens provided on the floors
MAC 324 where the second operator is to operate.
C - 324
M-3 H-3
0Vdc 0Vdc
203 203
+24 +24
A NO
B. Single-phase or direct current operator connections with cam signal. Type DEL-2 or DEL-5 box.
M - 6 ( CDE - 1 )
Signal Photocell enabled

2221
0Vp
1
+24
0Vdc A 1, 2
222
2222
22 21 24 14 11 12
To inspection box
RDE RDE
A
M-4 (CDE-2) PDE - 01
DEL 2 OP 1 OP 2
G2R-2C G2R-2C
RDE RCEL
24 Vdc 24 Vdc
PAP2
No statics
PAP2' 41-PDE 01
photocell 42-PDE 01
2
RCEL
RCEL
M-4 (CDE-2) 31 34 41 42 A 0 Vdc

DEL 5
OUT2
Statics OUT
Operator 1 always works.
photocell OUT1 Operator 2 works on some floors.
They do coincide on some floors.
Place the screens provided on the floors where
both operators are to operate simultaneously.
MAC 324
C - 324
M-3 H-3
0Vdc 0Vdc
203 203
+24 +24
A NO

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
C. Single-phase or direct current operator connections with cam signal. Type DEL-3 or DEL-6 box.
M - 6 ( CDE - 1 )
2221
0Vp
1
+24
0Vdc A1 2
222
2222 A2 1, 2
22 21 24 14 11 12 22 21 24 14 11 12
To inspection box
A2
RDE RDE RDE RDE
PDE - 01 PDE - 02
A1
G2R-2C G2R-2C G2R-2C
G2R-2C
RDE RCEL RDE RCEL
OP 1
24 Vdc
24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
OP 2
RCEL
RCEL
RCEL
RCEL
31 34 41 42 A 0 Vdc 31 34 41 42 A 0 Vdc
M-4 (CDE-2) A1 A2
DEL 6
Statics OUT2
photocell OUT
OUT1
Operator 1 works on some floors.

A2 NO Operator 2 works on the remaining floors.
C - 327
MAC 327 M-4 H-4 They do coincide on some floors.
FZS FZS A2 Place the screens provided on the floors where
0Vdc 0Vdc
203 203
A1 operator 2 is to operate and where they are to operate
+24 +24 simultaneously.
A1 NO
PDE - 01 31 34 41 42 PDE - 02 31 34 41 42
M-4 (CDE-2)
No statics DEL 3
photocell
PAP2
PAP2'
2
D. Single-phase dual operator connections. Type DEM-1 or DEM-4 box.
M - 10 ( CDE - 1 ) Signal Photocell enabled
2221
2231 1
222
0Vp A 2
+24
0Vdc
221
223
2232
To inspection box
2222
22 21 24 14 11 12
A
M-4 (CDE-2) RDE RDE
DEM 1 PDE - 01 A
No statics PAP2
31-PDE 01
G2R-2C G2R-2C OP 1 OP 2
34,41-PDE 01 RDE RCEL
24 Vdc 24 Vdc
photocell PAP2'
42-PDE 01
2
RCEL
RCEL
M-4 (CDE-2)
31 34 41 42 A 0 Vdc
DEM 4
OUT2
Statics
OUT
photocell OUT1

Operator 2 works on the remaining floors.
MAC 324 C - 324 They do not coincide on any floor.
M-3 H-3 Place the screens provided on the floors
0Vdc 0Vdc where the second operator is to operate.
203 203
+24 +24
A NO

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
E. Single-phase dual operator connections. Type DEM-2 or DEM-5 box.
M - 10 ( CDE - 1 )
2221
2231
222 1
0 Vp A 1, 2
+24
0Vdc
221
223
2232
2222
To inspection box
22 21 24 14 11 12 22 221OP2 24
PDE - OP
OP2
G2R-1C
RDE RDE
24 Vac
OP 1 OP 2
M-4 (CDE-2) 16 A.
DEM 2 PDE - 01
G2R-1C OP2
G2R-2C
No statics PAP2
41-PDE 01 24 Vdc
RDE RCEL
G2R-2C
24 Vdc
24 Vac
PAP2' 16 A.
photocell 2
42-PDE 01 OP1
OP1
RCEL
RCEL
M-4 (CDE-2) 31 34 41 42 A 0 Vdc OP1 12 14 0 Vp

DEM 5
Statics OUT2
photocell OUT
OUT1
Operator 1 always operates.

MAC 324 Operator 2 operates on some floors.
C - 324
M-3 H-3 They do coincide on some floors.
0Vdc 0Vdc
203 203
+24 +24 both operators are to operate simultaneously.
A NO
F. Single-phase dual operator connections. Type DEM-3 or DEM-6 box.
M - 10 ( CDE - 1 )
2221
2231
222
0Vp Signal Photocell enabled
+24
0Vdc
221
1
223 A1 2
2232
2222 A2 1, 2
To inspection box
22 21 24 14 11 12 22 21 24 14 11 12 22 221 OP2 24
PDE - OP
OP2 G2R-1C
24 Vac
RDE RDE RDE RDE

16 A. A2
PDE - 01 PDE - 02
OP2
A1
G2R-2C G2R-2C G2R-2C G2R-2C
RDE RCEL RDE RCEL
Statics
24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
G2R-1C OP 1 OP 2
24 Vac OP1
OP1
photocell 16 A.
RCEL
RCEL
RCEL
RCEL
M-4 (CDE-2) 31 34 41 42 A 0Vdc 31 34 41 42 A 0Vdc OP1 12 14 0Vp

DEM 6
A1 A2
OUT2
OUT
OUT1
A2 NO
C - 327
MAC 327 M-4 H-4
FZS FZS A2
0Vdc 0Vdc
203 203 A1 Operator 2 works on the remaining floors.
+24 +24
A1 NO
operator 2 is to operate and where they are
PDE - 01 PDE - 02 to operate simultaneously.
M-4 (CDE-2) 31 34 41 42 31 34 41 42
DEM 3
No statics
PAP2
photocell PAP2'
2

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
G. Three-phase or direct current dual operator connections. Type DET-1 or DET-4 box.
M - 5 ( CDE - 1 )
237'
234
1
+24
0Vdc A 2
235'
22 21 24 14 11 12
To inspection box
M-4 (CDE-2)
DET1 RDE RDE
31-PDE 01
PDE - 01
No statics PAP2
34,41-PDE 01 G2R-2C G2R-2C
photocell PAP2' RDE RCEL
42-PDE 01 24 Vdc 24 Vdc
2 A
RCEL
RCEL A
M-4 (CDE-2)
DET4
31 34 41 42 A 0 Vdc OP 1 OP 2
OUT2
Statics OUT
photocell OUT1
Operator 2 works on the remaining floors.
They do not coincide on any floor.
MAC 324
C - 324 Place the screens provided on the floors
M-3 H-3 where the second operator is to operate.
0Vdc 0Vdc
203 203
+24 +24
A NO
H. Three-phase or direct current dual operator connection. Type DET-2 or DET-5 box.
M - 5 ( CDE - 1 )
237'
234 1
+24 A 1, 2
0Vdc
235'
22 21 24 14 11 12
To inspection box
M-4 (CDE-2)
(DET 2) RDE RDE
PDE - 01
No statics PAP2
PAP2'
41-PDE 01 G2R-2C G2R-2C
photocell 42-PDE 01 24 Vdc
RDE RCEL
24 Vdc A
2
OP 1 OP 2
RCEL
RCEL
M-4 (CDE-2) 31 34 41 42 A 0 Vdc

(DET 5)
OUT2
Statics
OUT
photocell OUT1 Operator 1 always operates.
Operator 2 operates on some floors.
MAC 324
C - 324 both operators are to operate simultaneously.
M-3 H-3
0Vdc 0Vdc
203 203
+24 +24
A NO

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
I. Three-phase or direct current dual operator connection. Type DET-3 or DET-6 box.
M - 5 ( CDE - 1 )
237'
234 1
+24
0Vdc
A1 2
235' A2 1, 2
To inspection box
22 21 24 14 11 12 22 21 24 14 11 12
A2
RDE RDE RDE RDE
PDE - 01 PDE - 02 A1
G2R-2C G2R-2C G2R-2C G2R-2C
RDE RCEL RDE RCEL
24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc OP 1 OP 2
RCEL
RCEL
RCEL
RCEL
M-4 (CDE-2) 31 34 41 42 A 0Vdc 31 34 41 42 A 0Vdc
DET 6
A1 A2
Statics OUT2
OUT
photocell OUT1

A2 NO
C - 327 Operator 2 works on the remaining floors.
MAC 327 M-4 H-4
FZS FZS A2
0Vdc 0Vdc Place the screens provided on the floors where
203 A1
203
operator 2 is to operate and where they are
+24 +24
to operate simultaneously.
A1 NO
PDE - 01 PDE - 02
M-4 (CDE-2) 31 34 41 42 31 34 41 42
DET 3
No statics
photocell PAP2
PAP2'
2

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.3. Shaft installation
5.3.1.Safety series in shaft
5.3.1.1 Without emergency electric control unit
CH2
104 105 103 220 PE
XLV
Black
Speed governor
SLVH contact in shaft
Black
Brown
Brown
XTL
Speed governor cable tension contact
STLH
(In case of speed governor in car).
Green / yellow
XCT
Hatch contact
SCTH in shaft
XFS
Upper final limit
SFS switch contact
Car presence detector contact (SP) and outside locks

contact (SCE) (semi-automatic doors only) Outside locks contact (SCE)
...
XCS 105 104 PE
SCE XCA
Green SP
SCE
XCS
SCE XCA
Green SP
SCE
XFI
SFI Lower final limit switch

contact (electric lifts only)
XAM
Pit buffer contact
SAM (hydraulic lifts only)
SAM
XTL
STLH tension contact
STOPF Pit stop

XCTS
CTS

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.3.1.2. With emergency electric control unit
CHA_ CH2
202 302 PE 105 104 103 220 PE
Speed governor
XTL
contact in shaft
STLH Speed governor cable XLV
Black
tension contact (In case SLVH
of speed governor in car).
XCT
Black
Brown
Brown
SCTH
XFS SFS
Hatch contact Upper final limit
in shaft switch contact
XFI
SFI
Lower final limit
XTL STLH switch contact
tension contact in pit. Pit buffer contact
(hydraulic lifts only)
SAM
XAM SAM
STOPF
XCTS
Pit stop
XCS
Green
SCE
SP
CTS
Green
XCS
SCE
SP
Car presence detector contact (SP) and outside locks Green
contact (SCE) (semi-automatic doors only)
...
105 104 PE
XCA
SCE
XCA
SCE
Outside locks contact (SCE)
In case of automatic doors

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.3.2.Terminal stopping switches
CH2 CH1
226 228 0Vdc +24
Red
White
Black
White / blue
0Vdc 0Vdc
XAFS SAFS
+24 +24
228 228
0Vdc 0Vdc
XAFI SAFI
+24 +24
226 226
5.3.3. Pit box
XTF CC2 CH1 CH2 XAH

TFN TFN 208 +24 103 220 t NCA NOA CA 212 211
Blue
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Red
Black
Black
Orange
Brown
Violet
TC
211 211
212 212
CA XCAF CA
NOA NOA
NCA NCA SAHF
220 220 STOPF

103 XCTS 103
+24 +24
208 208
TFN TFN
TFN
XTF TFN
TFN
5.3.4. Landing control stations

Selective ascent + occupied indicator light
Selective descent
CH2 CH1
CH2 CH1 215 213 11_ 110
213 11_ 110
Pink
Violet
Blue
Blue
Violet
Red
Blue
B33 110 B01 110

110 11- 11-
SPEB_
110
SPEB_ - +
11- 11- 213 213
- + - VREB_
213 213 215 215
VREB_ VOCUP
+
Selective descent + up and down arrow Selective ascent and descent

CH2 CH1
218 217 213 11_ 110 CH2 CH1
213 11_ 11_ 110
Blue
Violet
Red
Grey
Grey
Yellow
White/blue
Violet
Red
110 B02 110

11- 11-
SPEB_ 110 S01 110
213 - + 11- 11-
SPEB_
213
VREB_ SPES_
217 217 3- 3-
218 218 213 213 + -
+ + VREB_
VFS VFB + -
VRES_
- -

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.4. Special wiring
5.4.1. Safety series
A. Without emergency electric control unit
Machine room Car Inspection box
(4) (2) STOP

SIR
RMT1 SAC STLC SLVC SCTC SAF
110 Vs FM SPRB
15 12 8
5 6 102
PCB SPRS
MICROBASIC
STOPF
(3) (6) (7)
SCC SCE SP STLH SAM SFI SFS SCTH STLH SLVH
106 105 104 103
Shaft Shaft
(5) (1) 220
PIN 103
B. With emergency electric control unit

Machine room Shaft Inspection box Car
STOPF STOP'
(3) (5) STOP SIR (4)
RMT1 STLH SCTH STLH SAF SCTC STLC
110 Vs FM SPRB
15 12 202 302 402
5 6
PCB SPRS
MICROBASIC
(6) (7)
Shaft
(1) (2) Car
SCC SCE SP SAM SFI SFS SLVH SLVC SAC SIR'

106 105 104 103 A
8 502
220 102
MES box
Shaft SPRS' SPRB'
PIN 103
602
(1) In case of speed governor in shaft.

(2) In case of speed governor in car.
(3) In case of speed governor tension contact in shaft.
(4) In case of speed governor tension contact in car.
(5) In case of dual speed governor tension contact in shaft.
(6) In case of hydraulic installations.
(7) In case of electric installations.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.4.2. Call and register indicator light
5.4.2.1. Car
• Up to 19 levels
(+24)
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
CC1
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
+24 A B C D
0Vcc
SPC10
SPC1
SPC2
SPC3
SPC4
SPC5
SPC6
SPC7
SPC8
SPC9
HRC10
HRC1
HRC2
HRC3
HRC4
HRC5
HRC6
HRC7
HRC8
HRC9
0 Vdc - CC2
• Up to 16 levels (AMB1 / AMB2)
(+24)
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
CC1 CH1
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
+24 A B C D
0Vcc
SPC10
SPC11
SPC12
SPC13
SPC14
SPC15
SPC16
SPC1
SPC2
SPC3
SPC4
SPC5
SPC6
SPC7
SPC8
SPC9
HRC10
HRC11
HRC12
HRC13
HRC14
HRC15
HRC16
HRC1
HRC2
HRC3
HRC4
HRC5
HRC6
HRC7
HRC8
HRC9
0 Vdc - CC2

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.4.2.2. Landing
• Simplex up to 10 levels, selective descent or universal
Placa MicroBASIC
(+24)
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
CH1
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
+24 A B C D
SPE10 0Vcc
SPE1
SPE2
SPE3
SPE4
SPE5
SPE6
SPE7
SPE8
SPE9
HRE10
HRE1
HRE2
HRE3
HRE4
HRE5
HRE6
HRE7
HRE8
HRE9
0 Vdc - CH2
• Simplex up to 6 levels, selective ascent and descent
Placa MicroBASIC
(+24)
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
CH1
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
+24 A B C D
0Vcc
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPES1
SPES2
SPES3
SPES4
SPES5
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HRES1
HRES2
HRES3
HRES4
HRES5
0 Vdc - CH2

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Simplex from 11 to 16 levels, selective descent or universal

Placa AMB1
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100
SPE10
SPE11
SPE12
SPE13
SPE14
SPE15
SPE16
SPE1
SPE2
SPE3
SPE4
SPE5
SPE6
SPE7
SPE8
SPE9
HRE10
HRE11
HRE12
HRE13
HRE14
HRE15
HRE16
HRE1
HRE2
HRE3
HRE4
HRE5
HRE6
HRE7
HRE8
HRE9
• Simplex from 7 to 16 levels, selective ascent and descent
Placa AMB1
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 100
109 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 100
SPEB10
SPEB11
SPEB12
SPEB13
SPEB14
SPEB15
SPEB16
SPES10
SPES11
SPES12
SPES13
SPES14
SPES15
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPEB7
SPEB8
SPEB9
SPES1
SPES2
SPES3
SPES4
SPES5
SPES6
SPES7
SPES8
SPES9
HREB10
HREB11
HREB12
HREB13
HREB14
HREB15
HREB16
HRES10
HRES11
HRES12
HRES13
HRES14
HRES15
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HREB7
HREB8
HREB9
HRES1
HRES2
HRES3
HRES4
HRES5
HRES6
HRES7
HRES8
HRES9

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Duplex up to 10 levels, selective descent, 1 row
Placa MicroBASIC Ascensor 1 Placa MicroBASIC Ascensor 2

(+24)
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
CH1 - ASC1 CH1 - ASC2
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
+24 A B C D +24 A B C D
0Vcc 0Vcc
SPEB10
SPEB1
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPEB7
SPEB8
SPEB9
HREB10
HREB1
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HREB7
HREB8
HREB9
0 Vdc - CH2 0 Vdc - CH2

ASC1 ASC2
• Duplex up to 6 levels, selective ascent and descent, 1 row.

(+24)
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
+24 A B C D +24 A B C D
0Vcc 0Vcc
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPES1
SPES2
SPES3
SPES4
SPES5
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HRES1
HRES2
HRES3
HRES4
HRES5

ASC1 ASC2

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Duplex from 11 to 16 levels, selective descent, 1 row
Placa AMB21
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100
CHB1 - AMB2
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100
SPEB10
SPEB11
SPEB12
SPEB13
SPEB14
SPEB15
SPEB16
SPEB1
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPEB7
SPEB8
SPEB9
HREB10
HREB11
HREB12
HREB13
HREB14
HREB15
HREB16
HREB1
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HREB7
HREB8
HREB9
• Duplex from 7 to 16 levels, selective ascent and descent, 1 row
Placa AMB2
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 100
CHB1 - AMB2 CHS1 - AMB2
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 100
SPEB10
SPEB11
SPEB12
SPEB13
SPEB14
SPEB15
SPEB16
SPES10
SPES11
SPES12
SPES13
SPES14
SPES15
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPEB7
SPEB8
SPEB9
SPES1
SPES2
SPES3
SPES4
SPES5
SPES6
SPES7
SPES8
SPES9
HREB10
HREB11
HREB12
HREB13
HREB14
HREB15
HREB16
HRES10
HRES11
HRES12
HRES13
HRES14
HRES15
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HREB7
HREB8
HREB9
HRES1
HRES2
HRES3
HRES4
HRES5
HRES6
HRES7
HRES8
HRES9

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Duplex up to 10 levels, selective descent, 2 rows

(+24)
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
+24 A B C D +24 A B C D
0Vcc 0Vcc
SPEB10
SPEB10
SPEB1
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPEB7
SPEB8
SPEB9
SPEB1
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPEB7
SPEB8
SPEB9
HREB10
HREB10
HREB1
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HREB7
HREB8
HREB9
HREB1
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HREB7
HREB8
HREB9

ASC1 ASC2
• Duplex up to 6 levels, selective ascent and descent, 2 rows

(+24)
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 +24 A B C D
+24 A B C D +24 A B C D
0Vcc 0Vcc
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPES1
SPES2
SPES3
SPES4
SPES5
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPES1
SPES2
SPES3
SPES4
SPES5
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HRES1
HRES2
HRES3
HRES4
HRES5
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HRES1
HRES2
HRES3
HRES4
HRES5

ASC1 ASC2

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
• Duplex from 10 to 16 levels, selective descent, 2 rows
Placa AMB2
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100
CHB1 - AMB2 CHB2 - AMB2
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100
SPE10
SPE11
SPE12
SPE13
SPE14
SPE15
SPE16
SPE10
SPE11
SPE12
SPE13
SPE14
SPE15
SPE16
SPE1
SPE2
SPE3
SPE4
SPE5
SPE6
SPE7
SPE8
SPE9
SPE1
SPE2
SPE3
SPE4
SPE5
SPE6
SPE7
SPE8
SPE9
HRE10
HRE11
HRE12
HRE13
HRE14
HRE15
HRE16
HRE10
HRE11
HRE12
HRE13
HRE14
HRE15
HRE16
HRE1
HRE2
HRE3
HRE4
HRE5
HRE6
HRE7
HRE8
HRE9
HRE1
HRE2
HRE3
HRE4
HRE5
HRE6
HRE7
HRE8
HRE9
• Duplex from 11 to 16 levels, selective ascent and descent, 2 rows
Placa AMB2
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 100
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 100
SPEB10
SPEB11
SPEB12
SPEB13
SPEB14
SPEB15
SPES10
SPES11
SPES12
SPES13
SPES14
SPES15
SPEB1
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPEB7
SPEB8
SPEB9
SPES1
SPES2
SPES3
SPES4
SPES5
SPES6
SPES7
SPES8
SPES9
HREB10
HREB11
HREB12
HREB13
HREB14
HREB15
HREB16
HRES10
HRES11
HRES12
HRES13
HRES14
HRES15
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HREB7
HREB8
HREB9
HRES1
HRES2
HRES3
HRES4
HRES5
HRES6
HRES7
HRES8
HRES9
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 100
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 100 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 100
SPEB10
SPEB11
SPEB12
SPEB13
SPEB14
SPEB15
SPES10
SPES11
SPES12
SPES13
SPES14
SPES15
SPEB1
SPEB2
SPEB3
SPEB4
SPEB5
SPEB6
SPEB7
SPEB8
SPEB9
SPES1
SPES2
SPES3
SPES4
SPES5
SPES6
SPES7
SPES8
SPES9
HREB10
HREB11
HREB12
HREB13
HREB14
HREB15
HREB16
HRES10
HRES11
HRES12
HRES13
HRES14
HRES15
HREB2
HREB3
HREB4
HREB5
HREB6
HREB7
HREB8
HREB9
HRES1
HRES2
HRES3
HRES4
HRES5
HRES6
HRES7
HRES8
HRES9

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.4.3. Lighting installation
Lighting supply must be independent of mains supply. Shaft and car lighting must also be independent (EN 81-1.2;
13.6).
Machine room SCSM

switch
QIAC
10A
210 212 211 212 RBF RBN 210 212 211 212 CA NOA NCA RBF RBN
CAC RB' CAH
Controller
Controller
Protection board
210 212 211 212 RBF RBN 210 212 211 212 CA NOA NCA RBF RBN
QAC' QAH'
HRB1
HRB2
2 3
HLC
HRB3
SAHF
1
.....
F N
TCC HRB' TCC HRBn
Car light+ Car roof Power socket in String of

FID power socket in light pit box lights
inspection box
NOTE: there are intermediate connectors, which are not represented.

QAC’, QAH’ and FA are to be installed in the protection board. Not supplied with the installation.
See point 1.3. “Installation requirements”.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.4.4. Telephone installation
SIR SARC
3 6
SARI 2 7 CAR ROOF

MACHINE ROOM CONTROLLER 1
Totally open
Inspection box
SIR SIB SIS STOPC
Battery door contact

SARI SCI
alarm box
(1 per lift in
case of
Multiplex)
BAT 12Vdc 6 7
0Vp
220Vp
g - P2
J1 240V J3 C- AL1AL2PAP2 0Vdc 1 2 3
(MBAS) XARP
Telephone supply
6 7
CT2ATE00 CB XARI
XARN
RUN 220 0Vp
5 4
5 4
C- AL1AL2PAP2 0Vdc 1 2 3
XTFN
13 12
13 12
XARF
CCA_ X220
CCA_ X220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 13
XAR1 XAR2
TFNTFN RUN 220 0Vp MB-EN8128-1
SAL XAR3 XAR4
P25
16 15 14 +24 RUN AL+ 0Vdc
P25
J1
AL1
AL2
Fonomac 0Vdc - CB
P25
P25 24Vdc - CB1
AL1
AL2
CAR
CONTROLLER
TELE ALARM
1 2 3
4 5 6
Telephone
7 8 9
system
0 #
*
220 0Vp TFN TFN RUN
CBTF CBA_
X220 CBTF CBA_
220 0Vp TFNTFN RUN

Pit box
Magnetic
switch
SARN
4
5
Travelling cable
SARF
SARF
12
13
Car base

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.4.4.1. Description of compliance with EN81-28:
The telephone will accept the alarm request, when the circuit connected to terminals ALARM OPENS for two or more
seconds.
First filtering situation: If contact SARN is closed (lift in door release area) and contact SARP is closed (car door
totally open and also landing door, since the lift is in door release area), although alarm button is pushed in car control
station SAL, circuit (2)-(15) will remain closed and will not respond to the request.
Second filtering situation: While the car is moving, relay RL2 is enabled (possible pressing of car alarm pushbutton
SAL is not accepted, but it is saved by the control unit provided that it is pressed for more than two seconds). When
reaching the next landing relay RL2 is disabled and filtering finishes.
If car doors open, no action will be taken. If not and pressing of SAL for more than two seconds during the previous
service was saved, then the control unit will make the alarm call by enabling relay RL1.
During repair and maintenance operations: In car roof or pit, if alarm needs to be sent press SARI or SARF
respectively; these actions will never be filtered. Anyhow, by enabling inspection control unit (contact SIR), even
previously described filters are cancelled (alarm pushbutton in car control station).
ENABLING / DISABLING ALARM FILTERING:

To ENABLE alarm filtering TWO ACTIONS are necessary:
On the one hand, install Jumper J1 (in board VS_ALRM) and program parameter P013 in SI of block SAFETY in the
control unit.
To DISABLE filtering proceed the other way round (remove jumper J1 and P013=NO, SAFETY).

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.4.5. Load weighing device

Load weighing device is a mecanical or electrical device which informs the control unit of the car load through contact or
sensors. These contacts or sensors can be found between frame and car, in the bedframe or in the traction cables.
There are different configurations depending on whether it is electric or mechanical and where contacts and sensors are
located.
LM3D + CCP + display DSC or pilot LM3D + CCP + MICELET display
Controller Controller
216
220Vp 0Vp +24 b d
CBC_
CSMM
220Vac 0Vac +24 91 107
D+ D-
CBC_
CBC_
216 D+ D- 220Vac 0Vac +24 91 107
D+ D-
Travelling
cable Car control
216
216
CBA_
station
Car control
Travelling station
cable D- D+
D- D+
+24 Vdc
CBA_
Load pressure switch + display DSC or pilot Mechanical load weighing device
+24 +24 b
f
d
b
216
91 107 216
CBC_
+24 91 CCS
+24 91 107
CBC_
Car control
216 91 107 216 station
CPS
Car control
+24 91 107
station
Travelling
Travelling cable
216 107 91
216 107 91
CCS
CCS
216
216
cable
CBA_
VSOBC VSOBC
+24 Vdc
+24 Vdc

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
ILC2 / ILC3 display DSC or pilot ILC3 + MICELET display
Controller
f f
d d
b Controller
b
91 107 216 91 107 216
CCS CCS
+24 91 107 0Vdc +24 91 107 0Vdc D+ D-
CCS CPS CPD
91 107 216 91 107 216
Car control CPS

Car control
station station CPS CPD
+24 91 107 0Vdc +24 91 107 0Vdc D+ D-

Travelling Travelling
216 107 91
216 107 91
216 107 91
216 107 91
cable cable
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
0Vdc 0Vdc
+24 Vdc +24 Vdc

BOT. CABINA
LMCAB + CAB + display DSC or pilot LM3D + CAB + MICELET display
f f
d d
b b
221
221 t
91 107 216 91 107 216
t 0Vp
0Vp
CCS CCS
+24 91 107 +24 91 107 D+ D-
91 107 216 91 107 216
Car control CPS

Car control CPS CPD
station station
+24 91 107 +24 91 107 D+ D-
Travelling Travelling
216 107 91
216 107 91
216 107 91
216 107 91
CCS
CCS
cable cable
+24 Vdc +24 Vdc

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
Load weighing device VK-2P.
AL-C
AL-S MENU
AUX
SERIE VK
LOAD WEIGHING DEVICE
MACPUARSA
VK-2P ON CAR ROOF
SENSOR RS-485 AL-C AL-S VK-2P

Kg
3 6 220 Vac HOLD

1 4
MALLA
EXC +
ConF=1
EXC -
2 5 - +
+ IN
- IN
(Overload and complete relay T1 T2
normally energised)
Note: front of connectors shown

here, but connection is made by
turning these connectors
Special pole
connector
LOAD CELLS S6
MALLA -IN +IN EXC-EXC+ S4 C3 C1 T2 T1 D+ D- INH INH 220 0Vp
BETWEEN FRAME AND CAR
25 cm TUBE
2 Mts TUBE
Red (Wiring 50 cm)
Black
Green
Violet
Green Inspection box
Brown
Pink
Red
Black
G/Y
Blue
Red
White
Mesh 0Vp-CR3
Orange
Orange
0 Vdc
220VpINH
T1 T2 +24 91 107 D- D+
M2
H3 H2
M2
Car control station
CCA1
H2
M3 D- D+ M2
H2 220Vp INH
T1 T2 Progressive
+24 91 107
display
MB-D
Orange
Orange
White/Blue
107
Violet 91 Kg
Red +24
Controller
Inspection box
H2 3VFMAC Control station
travelling
travelling
T2 T2 cable
T1 T1 cable
Violet M2 H2
*
T1 T2
T1 T2
Yellow
+24 Vdc K1 M2 H2
(22 MBAS)
INH INH
220 Vp 220Vp 220Vp
F4
* In case of VVVF installations only

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5. Particulary wiring
5.5.1. Intercom set
Controller
Intercom set in
machine room
220Vp 0Vp
220Vp 0Vp ALT GND INT INT
220Vp
0Vp
GND
ALT
220Vp0Vp ALTGND INT INT
Inspection box
travelling cable
Intercom set on
car roof
INT INT
220Vp
0Vp
GND
ALT
INT INT
Inspection box
5.5.2. Dual intercom set
Intercom set in
machine room
220Vp 0Vp
220Vp 0Vp ALT GND I N TI N T I N TI N T
Intercom set on
220Vp
0Vp
GND
ALT
car roof
220Vp 0Vp ALT GND I N TI N T I N TI N T
Intercom set
at the lodge
I N TI N T
INT
INT
Inspection box
I N TI N T
220Vac
0Vac
GND
ALT
220Vac
0Vac

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.3. Speed governor remote operation
0Vp 220Vp Voltage on request
SALV
RL2 RL1
* * According voltage
F1 (2A)
OFF
CHA_
CRL CRL
RL2 RL2
RL1 RL1
Shaft installation
(In case of speed
governor in shaft)
Brown Pink
CRL CRL
Black White
RL2 RL2
Blue Green
RL1 RL1
XRLV
Inspection box
travelling cable.
L2 L1 (In case of speed
governor in car)
Brown
CRL CRL
Black
RL2 RL2
Blue
RL1 RL1
XRLV
L2 L1
5.5.4. Alarm identification in multiple installations
Alarm indicator light

outside the cabinet
Controller
1N 4007 330 Ohm
- +
AE- AE+
AE- AE+
PLACA 222 REV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Inspection box
AE- AE+
travelling cable
5
AE- AE+
AE- AE+
Inspection box 8

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.5. Emergency electric control unit
Emergency electric control unit box
Controller
CRD CRD
11_ - CC1 11X/S 11X/S SIR'
111 - CC1 111/B 111/B
RD RD
SPRB'
208 - CC2 208 208
0 Vdc 0Vdc 0Vdc
PIN 103 602 602 1K5 SPRS'
8 - MBAS 502 502
402 402
STOP'
SIR'
SPRB' SPRS'
STOP
SIR 208-CC2
+24 Vdc SPRB
111/B-CB
SPRS
11X/S-CB
CCA_ CCA_
SCTC* SAF
RD RD
402 402
SIR
302 302
STOP SPRB
Inspection box SPRS
CHA_ CHA_ STOPF

SCTH* STLH
12 MBAS 302 302
202 202
Pit box
* Optional

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.6. Programmable inputs and outputs of MicroBASIC board

In case of stop in car
or movable sill
27 KRSTOP To contactors
19
20 k - P2 Only electric lifts
22
120 - CC1 Only hydraulic lifts
A2 A2 A2 **
KFB G2R KRLE G2R KRAC G2R
KRPS KRPB KRLE
+24Vdc +24Vdc +24Vdc
98ST 97ST A1 A1 A1
j
k
i
h
g Complete light
f Overload light
Complete 36V
d
A2 **
Overload
b G2R
+24Vdc
**
KRSTOP
A1
91 107 216 2' 3'
STOP
SSB SCO LSB

SPM PCP
+24Vdc
+24Vdc
5.5.7. Speed change mode “3C”
120-CC!*
*this connection depend on type of installation
see parameter 36
3C
az 324 +24 3C
+24203 0V
Control panel CCA_ +24 +24

324
m NO
3C
Additional magnetic
3C
CCA_
3C
CRA_
Inspection box
CRA_
3C
Travelling cable

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.8. Imminent departure direction arrows
22-P3
B-CH1 C-CH1
A-CH1 D-CH1
A2 A2
22-P3 19-P3 G2R G2R
RPB RPS
24Vdc 24Vdc
A1 A1
0Vp 220Vp
0Vs 110Vs
0Vdc 60Vs h-P3 i-P3
+24Vdc
S +24 A B C D 0Vdc MS-MPX
14 14
RPS RPB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11 11
217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217
218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218 218
5.5.9. Coming indicator lights in simplex and duplex universal control units/Multiplexed display (multiplexed
output)
118-CH1 119-CH1
117-CH1 120-CH1
22-P3 19-P3
220Vp S +24 A B C D 0Vdc

110Vs MS-MPX
60Vs
20Vs
+24V
1 2 3 4 5 16
261 262 263 264 265 276
Coming indicator lights
213
NOTE: MP indication include diodes

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.10. Coming indicator lights in simplex and duplex selective control units
B-CH1 C-CH1
A-CH1 D-CH1
22-P3 19-P3
220Vp
110Vs
S +24 A B C D 0Vdc
MS-MPX
60Vs
+24Vdc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276
22-P3 213-CH2
A2 11
G2R-1
RAC
24Vdc
A1 RAC Coming indicator lights
14
h-P2
5.5.11. Imminent departure direction arrows and coming indicator lights
22-P3
B-CH1 C-CH1
A-CH1 D-CH1
22-P3 19-P3 A2 A2 A2
G2R G2R G2R
24Vdc KRPB 24Vdc KRPS 24Vdc KRLA
0Vp A1 A1
A1
0Vs
220Vp
0Vdc
110Vs
60Vs h-P2 i-P2 g-P2
+24Vdc
14 14 14
KRLA KRPS KRPB

11 11 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276
Coming indicator lights
Imminent departure
direction arrows
MP indications include diodes.

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.12. Car at floor light
B-CH1 C-CH1
A-CH1 D-CH1
22-P3 19-P3
Voltage on
request
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16
*Conectar a 213 si
tensión de registro
es igual a tensión
de señalización.
Si es diferente,
viene identificada 213*
la conexión a realizar
1 speed 2 speeds Hydraulic 3VF
71 (81) 71 21 (31) 71 (81)

KCM KCS KVD K1
72 (82) 72 22 (32) 71 (82)
71 71 (81)
KCB KCM
72 72 (82)
5.5.13. Wiring modification to register voltage different of 24Vdc
* voltage on request
0 Vp (TRM)
0 Vs ~1
(+)
6 Vs ~2
(-)
*
0 Vp 12 Vs RR
CBC_ / CHA_
220 Vp (TRR) 20 Vs
(TRM)
380 Vp 48 Vs
60 Vs
+24
110 Vs
Fase (T)
0 Vdc Call pushbotton
0 Vcc Vcc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
MS - REL
0 Vcc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Registers
0Vdc

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.14. Inspection control box
CMRC H-7
Shaft-car installation rail
STOP'
Upper call
11x/S 111/B RC 208 8MB EM2 0Vdc
11x/S 111/B RC 208 8MB EM2 0Vdc

11x/S-CC1
Lower call 111/B-CC1 7 8 SPRB'
CMRC M-7
SIR'
208-CC2 SPRS'
8MBAS
EM2 1K5
0Vdc SIR'
1 2
STOP'
RC
SPRB'
SPRS'
CCA_x
M2
Inspection control box
CCA_x
H2
RC
SIR
STOP
SPRB
220-CR2
SPRS SAFC
208-CC2
SEC1
STOP
SPRB
111/B-CB.
SEC2
Lower call
SPRS SIR
SCTC
112/S-CB
Upper call
+24 Vdc
SLVC
RC
CRA_x
M2 STLC
SAC
102-CR2
RC
Control rope

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.15. Oil heating resistor
TS
0Vs 20Vs 20Vs
1 2 3 4 5
R
S
QCM
FRC1
FRC2
1P+N
10A
BYT11-1000
BYT11-1000
A1 A1
G2R-1 G2R-1
KRC1 KRC2
24Vdc 24Vdc
A2 A2
14 14
KRC1 KRC2
11 11
19MBAS
Manual cutoff
204 0 220RC1RC2
Resistor
If there is not motor or oil overtemperature, TS keeps the sign (24 Vdc), (TS1-TS2 = ON), in this situation TS keeps oil
heating resistance.
If there is overtemperature, KRC1 and KRC2 fall down and there is not feed.
FCA1, FCA2 = 2A when connection = 400Vac

= 3A when connection = 230Vac

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.16. Soft Stop
1.- DIRECT STARTING
25 mB 7 mB 11 mB 26 mB a mB
11 21
K3010
14 24
27 mB 24 mB
- Remove jumper J4
- Parameter 12 in B
240 205 206
(YS) (YD) (YR)
9 mB g mB
A2 A2
A1
KCG A1 KCM A1
A1 A1 G2R-1 BYT13
24Vdc K3010 1000
A2
22 mB
a mB c mB (24Vdc)
2.- START-DELTA STARTING
25 mB 7 mB 11 mB 26 mB a mB
53 (13) 11 21
KCE K3010
54 (14) 14 24
27 mB 24 mB
- Mechanical locking between KCT and KCE

- Remove jumper J4
240 205 206
(YS) (YD) (YR)
- Parameter 12 in B
9 mB g mB
A2 A2 A2
KCM A1 KCT A1 KCE A1 A1
A1 A1 A1 G2R-1 BYT13
61 61 24Vdc K3010 1000
KCE KCT A2
62 62
22 mB
a mB c mB e mB (24Vdc)

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
5.5.17. Oil refrigerator
To contactors
(standard wiring) To KVF
(standard wiring)
FILTRO
ZST12H
RRRSRT
Machine room
FR FS FT rail
XRFA
R S T
XRFA
H-3
RRRSRT
FR, FS, FT = 3.15 mm
Input connection
To oil refrigerator

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
ANNEX I. ABBREVIATIONS
A K
A A-Type Filter K1 Operation Contactor
ASC1 Lift 1 K2 Operation Contactor
ASC2 Lift 2 KCAP Door Opening Contactor
B KCB Down Contactor
B35 External Fire-Brigade Connector KCCP Door Closing Contactor
BR Landing Control Station Connector KCD Triangle Contactor
B Battery KCG General Contactor
C KCL Slow Speed Contactor
C-32X Mac 32x Magnetic Switch Connector KCM Operation Contactor
CAC Car Lighting Connector KCR Fast Speed Contactor
CAF Pit Lighting Connector KCS Down Contactor
CA Shaft Lighting Connector KRAC ‘Coming’ Relay
CAR Maintenance Box Lighting Connector KRB Down Relay
CB Car Control Station - Maintenance Box Connector KRET Start-Up Relay
CB1 Travelling Cable - Car Control Station Connector KRL Level Relay
CF Intercom Set Connector KRL3 Brake Control Relay
CC1 Car Travelling Cable Connector KRLB Down Landing Call Register
CC2 Car Travelling Cable Connector KRLE Cam Relay
CC3 Car Travelling Cable Connector KRLS Up Landing Call Register
CCA1 Auxiliary Connector 1 KRL1 Shifter Relay
CES Complete / Overload Connector KRL2 Relay Control Relay
CCTF Car Telephone Connector KRL3 Brake Control Relay
CDE Double Landing Box Connector KRM Operation Relay
CDH Shaft Display Connector KRMP Door Series Relay
CF Magnetic Switch Connector KRMR Maintenance Relay
CFTF Pit Telephone Connector KRPA KRZS Control Relay
CH1 Panel - Shaft Installation Connector KRPB Up Imminent Departure Relay
CH2 Panel - Shaft Installation Connector KRPS Down Imminent Departure Relay
CHB1 Shaft 1 Down Calls Connector KRS Up Relay
CHB2 Shaft 2 Down Calls Connector KRSE Direction Relay
CHS1 Shaft 1 Up Calls Connector KRSTOP Car Stop Relay
CHS2 Shaft 2 Up Calls Connector KRZS Safety Zone Relay
CHTF Shaft Telephone Connector KSG Safety Series Relay
COND Capacitor KVD Descent Relay
CR2 Maintenance Box Connector KVR Fast Speed Relay
CR3 Maintenance Box Connector L
CRD Emergency Electric Control Unit Box Connector LSB Overload Light
CRTF Maintenance Box Telephone Connector M
CSB Load Weighing Device Connector M-X X-Pole Socket Plug
CTS Pit Box P
D PCP Door Closing Pushbutton
D D-Type Filter Q
E QIB Battery Switch
EXT Exhaust Fan QIG Control Unit General Switch
F R
FCAP Door Opening Final Limit Switch RB Connector for String of Lights in Shaft
FCCP Door Closing Final Limit Switch RB (Cap4) Down Relay
FE Input Filter RBEXT Landing Call Bus Relay
FM Control Unit Fuse RB’ Connector for String of Lights in Car
FR Fuse R RCAB Car Call Bus Relay
FRTM Slow Speed Thermal Relay RET Start-Up Relay
FS Output Filter RF Brake Resistance
FT Fuse T RLB Down Light Relay
FV Valve Filter RLDO Available/Occupied Light Relay
G RLS Up Light Relay
GRF Brake Rectifier Board RM Operation Relay
GRL Cam Rectifier Board RMP Door Series Relay
GRV Valve Rectifier Board RMR Maintenance Relay
H RMT Voltage Control Unit Relay
H-X X- Pole Female Connector RPA RZS Control Relay

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
ROPA Automatic Door Opening Relay XCS1 Landing Door Connector

ROPC Automatic Door Closing Relay XCSn Landing Door Connector
RS Up Relay XCT Hatch Contact
RVR Fast Speed Relay XCTS Pit Box Connector
RTE Thermal Probe XF1 Photocell 1 Connector
RTP Thermal Relay XF2 Photocell 1 Connector
RVAR Varistor XFC Final Limit Switch Connector
S XFE Emergency Final Connector
SAC Safety Gear Contact XLV Overspeed Governor Connector
SAF Slack-Rope Contact XLVC Counterweight Overspeed Governor Connector
SAFI Lower Terminal Stopping Switch Contact XTL Overspeed Governor Tension Pulley Connector
SAFS Upper Terminal Stopping Switch Contact Y
SAHF Shaft - Pit Lighting Switch YD Descent Valve
SAM Buffer Contact YE Emergency Valve
SBB Fire-Brigade Key Switch YR Fast Speed Valve
SCC Car Lock Series YT Triangle Valve
SCE Landing Lock Series
SCEL Photocell Contact
SCO Complete Contact
SCT Hatch Contact
SFE Emergency Final Contact
SFI Lower Final Contact
SFS Upper Final Contact
SIR Maintenance Switch
SIR' Emergency Electric Control Unit Switch
SLV Overspeed Governor Contact
SM Machine Room Terminals
SO Overpressure Contact
SP Door Series
SPC Car Call Pushbutton
SPE Universal Landing Call Pushbutton
SPEB Down Landing Call Pushbutton
SPES Up Landing Call Pushbutton
SPM Movable sill
SPRB Maintenance Down Pushbutton
SPRB' Emergency Electric Control Unit Down Pushbutton
SPRS Maintenance Up Pushbutton
SPRS' Emergency Electric Control Unit Up Pushbutton
SSB Fire-Brigade Key Switch
ST Thermal Probe
STL Overspeed Governor Tension Pulley Contact
STOP Maintenance Box Stop Button
STOP' Emergency Electric Control Unit Stop Button
STOPF Pit Box Stop Button
STS Oil Temperature Contact
T
TC Power Socket
TLF Telephone Connection
TRV Valve Transformer
TS Thermal Probe
V
VDSP Available indicator light
VFB Down arrow
VFS Up arrow
VOCUP Occupied indicator light
VREB Landing down call register indicator light
VRES Landing up call register indicator light
VSOB Overload indicator light
X
XAFI Lower Terminal Stopping Switch Connector
XAFS Upper Terminal Stopping Switch Connector
XAM Buffer Connector
XCA1 Landing Door Connector
XCAn Landing Door Connector

TECHNICAL DOSSIER
ANNEX II. DIFFERENCES BETWEEN VERSIONS 3.01 AND 3.02
The following points has been included on chapter 5:
- 5.5.14: Inspection control box
- 5.5.15: Oil heating resistor
- 5.5.16: Soft Stop
- 5.5.17: Oil refrigerator
V3.02, NOV.05 Page 179 MTIPIEPMB302ES

www.macpuarsa.es
HEAD QUATER
Pabellón MP
Leonardo Da Vinci, 15
Isla de la Cartuja – 41092 Sevilla
Tel. +34.95.4630562
Fax +34.95.4657955
e-mail: info@macpuarsa.es

Pre-Assembled Electrical Installation Technical Dossier

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Pre-Assembled Electrical Installation Technical Dossier

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Pre-Assembled

• Any modification of this document, can be made without notice.

CHAPTER 1. PRE-ASSEMBLED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION MICROBASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.1. General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

CHAPTER 2. ASSEMBLY AND WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.1. General considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

V3.02, NOV.05 I MTIPIEPMB302GB

2.3.8.3. Direct current operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

CHAPTER 4. MICROBASIC CONTROL UNIT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.1. Compatibility. MicroBasic - MicroBasic Prima . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

V3.02, NOV.05 II MTIPIEPMB302GB

4.2.4.4. Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . . . . . . . 98

CHAPTER 5. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

5.1. Machine room installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

V3.02, NOV.05 III MTIPIEPMB302GB

5.5.1. Intercom set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . 166

ANNEX I. ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

ANNEX II. Differences between versions 3.01 and 3.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

V3.02, NOV.05 IV MTIPIEPMB302GB

CHAPTER 1. PRE-ASSEMBLED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION MICROBASIC

1.1. General features

1.2.1. PEI features

• Power supply voltage: 400Vac or 230Vac, frequency 50 or 60 Hz depending on local network.

On request it is possible to manufacture installations with special features.

V3.02, NOV.05 Page 1 MTIPIEPMB302GB

1.2.2. Features of MicroBASIC control unit

CONTROL UNIT SELECTIVE SELECTIVE

p # 10: MBAS single p # 10: MBAS single p#6: MBAS single

- p # 10: MBAS single p # 6: MBAS single

3 (TRIPLEX) - p # 16: AMB2

4 (QUADRUPLEX) - p # 16: AMB2

• MBAS single: n microBASIC boards.

p being: number of landings

• Broad functional range. Up to 64 configuration parameters.

V3.02, NOV.05 Page 2 MTIPIEPMB302GB

• Asymmetrical lifts (at upper or lower floors).

AMB2 architecture also presents other features (no AMB3):

Special functions for particular installations may be installed on request.

• EN 81-1/2 (in all points where it might be applicable).

1.3. Installation Requirements

V3.02, NOV.05 Page 3 MTIPIEPMB302GB

Three-phase volt. Approximate weight

Cut-off voltage Lighting voltage

V3.02, NOV.05 Page 4 MTIPIEPMB302GB

V CV Kw A mm2 Curve C 300 mA Curve C 30mA

V3.02, NOV.05 Page 5 MTIPIEPMB302GB

1.4. Components of PEI Microbasic

BLOCK ELEMENT LOCATION OTHER FEATURES

CONTROL BOARDS AND

IP2 ELECTRICALLY CONNECTS

FEATURES CONTROL ELEMENTS

V3.02, NOV.05 Page 6 MTIPIEPMB302GB

BLOCK ELEMENT LOCATION OTHER FEATURES

POSITION ACCORDING TO THE

TOGETHER WITH MAGNETS,

CALL BUTTONS. SIGNALLING

CONNECTS TELEPHONE, LIGHTING

FEATURES PLUG-IN CONNECTORS

UPPER AND LOWER

V3.02, NOV.05 Page 7 MTIPIEPMB302GB

BLOCK ELEMENT LOCATION OTHER FEATURES

UPPER AND LOWER

LANDING CONTROL ONE PER FLOOR. LANDING CALLS